JP2013102891A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of reducing damage due to a fraudulent act using "a dangling board".SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine 10, a sound lamp control unit 113 holds a lottery based on a particular losing command outputted by a main control unit 110. Then, the main control unit 110 changes the particular losing command by a predetermined change method while the sound lamp control unit 113 discriminates the particular losing command based on the predetermined change method even if the particular losing command is changed and outputted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113. Therefore, the main control unit 110 changes the particular losing command even if "the dangling board" is used to output the particular losing command to the sound lamp control unit 113, thereby preventing a fraudulent act using " the dangling board".

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Traditionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have a main control board that controls the game, a payout control board that controls the payout of prize balls (coins in slot machines) and lending balls, and a change display of symbols, etc. A sub control board such as a display control board for performing the display control is connected. The main control board outputs a patterned control signal necessary for the control to the slave control board, thereby controlling the processing of the winning ball and the design. By doing in this way, the control load of the main control board can be suppressed.

  The main control board executes various lotteries regarding whether or not the game is successful based on the establishment of a determination criterion such as winning of a game medium such as a game ball at the start opening, and advances the game based on the lottery result regarding whether or not the game is successful. Various control signals are output to the slave control board. Based on the control signal, the sub-control board executes a control to stop and display the lottery result in a manner to notify the player after the liquid crystal display device or the like displays the effect symbols and the like in a variable manner. When the lottery result is a win, a big win game that is controlled by the main control board and is in an advantageous state for the player is executed. The state advantageous to the player is not limited to the jackpot game, but there is a high probability gaming state in which the jackpot determination probability is set higher than usual. If the current state becomes a high probability gaming state, the main control board outputs a control signal related to the notification to the sub control board.

  In the slave control board of the gaming machine exemplified above, when a predetermined lottery performed based on a control signal transmitted from the main control board is won as in Patent Document 1, the gaming state of the main control board is determined. In some cases, the liquid crystal display device or the like notifies the player of the high probability gaming state that the player is in the high probability gaming state. In this gaming machine, if the player is out of a predetermined lottery performed based on the control signal transmitted from the main control board, even if the gaming state of the main control board is a high probability gaming state, There is no notification that the game is in progress. In that case, the player cannot actually determine whether the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a normal gaming state with a normal jackpot probability even though the player is actually in a high-probability gaming state. I must.

  Therefore, if the player is informed that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the player is likely to win a big hit, and thus continues the game. On the other hand, even if the high-probability gaming state is not informed, in fact, just by losing the predetermined lottery on the slave control board, there is an expectation that the gaming state of the master control board is a high-probability gaming state. The game may continue. With this configuration, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability gaming state is always notified, if the high-probability gaming state is not notified, the expectation for the jackpot will be diminished and the game will be stopped, but the high-probability gaming state will not necessarily be notified If the gaming machine is not used, the player continues to have a sense of expectation that the player may be in a high-probability gaming state even in the normal gaming state.

JP 2011-143151 A

  Recently, however, fraudulent activity using an unauthorized substrate called a “hanging substrate” has been reported. In this fraudulent act, an illegal board is attached between the main control board and the secondary control board (with an illegal "hanging board"), and the slave board is illegally notified of the high probability gaming state. It is something to make. Specifically, if the lottery performed by the slave control board is won based on the control signal transmitted from the master control board to the slave control board, if the actual gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is notified. To do. A circuit that illegally generates a control signal that triggers the lottery performed by the slave control board is provided in the “hanging board”, and the control signal is output from the “hanging board” to the slave control board. The lottery is performed many times to win, and when the main control board shifts to the high probability gaming state, the slave control board is informed of the high probability gaming state.

  By using this “hanging board”, the fraudster can continue the game only when the gaming state is known to be a high-probability gaming state, while playing the game when the gaming state is not a high-probability gaming state. Can be stopped. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain more profits than a player who normally plays a game. In game halls and the like, there has been a problem that a large amount of damage has been caused by fraudulent acts using this "hanging board".

  A gaming machine configured to display a game operation suggestion suggesting the progress of a game on a liquid crystal display device or the like when a predetermined condition is established based on a control signal transmitted from the main control board to the slave control board There is also. This game operation suggestion is an effect in which a predetermined profit is given to the player as a result of the game when the game as suggested by the liquid crystal display device or the like is played by the player. is there. Even in such a gaming machine, an illegal act of using a “hanging board” to output a control signal that triggers a predetermined condition to the slave control board and causing the slave control board to perform an illegal game operation suggestion. There is a problem to be done.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce damage caused by fraud using a “hanging board”.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for performing main control of the game, a slave control means for performing control based on a slave control signal from the master control means, and its slave control. And a game machine that executes a winning combination game that allows a player to acquire a predetermined gaming value when winning a winning combination. The control means includes a slave control signal generating means for generating the slave control signal based on establishment of a gaming condition, and a slave control signal for outputting the slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generating means to the slave control means. Output means, and the slave control means determines a slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the master control means, and the received slave control signal is determined by the discrimination means. Of the above game conditions When it is determined that the signal is a specific sub control signal generated based on the establishment of a specific game condition, a game action suggesting effect suggesting the progress of the game advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game If it is selected that the game action suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect lottery means, the game operation suggestion effect is performed by the effect execution means in the winning combination game. Suggesting execution means, and the slave control signal generating means of the main control means changes the generation method of the specific slave control signal based on a predetermined change rule, and the specific slave control signal is changed. The subordinate control means discriminating means discriminates the subordinate control signal output by the subordinate control signal output means of the main control means based on the predetermined change rule. Fruit, if the slave control signal becomes the certain slave control signals and determined that the specific game condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the main control means includes a main clocking means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and a main clocking from the main clocking means. Main time data acquisition means for acquiring data, and the sub control means is a sub time means synchronized with the main time means of the main time means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. , A time keeping data obtaining means for obtaining time keeping data from the time keeping means, and when at least one of the main control means and the sub control means is provided in the main control means, When it is provided in the slave control means, the slave time control data is corrected, and the slave control signal generation means of the master control means is configured to correct the master time data or the correction. When corrected by means Main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from a plurality of the change rules based on the main time data, and the sub control means is corrected by the sub time data or the correction means. Has sub change rule determining means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the corrected subordinate time data, and the main change rule determining means and the sub change rule determining means are: The same change rule is determined by correcting at least one of the main time data and the subordinate time data by the correction means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the main control means is a main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and a main timing from the main timing means. Main time data acquisition means for acquiring data, and the sub control means is a sub time means synchronized with the main time means of the main time means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. A slave time data acquisition means for acquiring slave time data from the slave time means, wherein at least one of the master control means and the slave control means is the master time data acquisition means and the slave time data acquisition means. And synchronization determination means for determining the timing at which the master time data and the slave time data can be acquired at the same timing, and the slave control signal generation means of the main control means is determined by the synchronization determination means. It has a main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the main timing data acquired by imming, and the sub control means is acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determining means Subordinate change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, in the main control means, a sub control signal is generated by the sub control signal generation means based on the establishment of the gaming condition, and the sub control signal is output by the sub control signal output means. Is output. In the slave control means, the received slave control signal is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the slave control signal is discriminated as a specific slave control signal generated on the basis of establishment of a specific game condition among the game conditions. Then, whether or not to execute a game action suggestion effect that is advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game is drawn by the suggestion effect lottery means. Then, in the lottery, when it is determined that the game operation suggesting effect is executed, the suggestion executing unit causes the effect executing unit to perform the game operation suggesting effect in the winning combination game. Thereby, the main control means does not perform the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the game action suggesting effect, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced.

  Here, the slave control signal generation means of the main control means generates a specific slave control signal by a generation method changed based on a predetermined change rule. In the slave control means, the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the main control means is discriminated by the discriminating means based on a predetermined change rule. As a result of the determination, when the sub control signal becomes a specific sub control signal, the determination means determines that a specific game condition is satisfied.

  Accordingly, when a specific slave control signal generated by the slave control unit by the generation method changed based on the predetermined change rule is output from the master control unit to the slave control unit, the slave control unit discriminating unit As a result of determining the changed specific sub control signal based on a predetermined change rule, it can be determined that a specific game condition is established.

  On the other hand, even if the “hanging board” or the like analyzes a specific slave control signal and outputs the analyzed specific slave control signal to the unauthorized slave control means, the specific slave control signal used in the gaming machine is not Even if the slave control means receives an illegal "specific slave control signal" output from the "hanging board", it is different from the regular "specific slave control signal". Can be determined. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent a specific game condition from being illegally established, there is an effect that damage caused by an illegal act using a “hanging board” or the like can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The

  At least one of the main control means and the sub control means is corrected by the correction means when it is provided in the main control means, and the subordinate time data is corrected by the correction means when provided in the sub control means. Then, in the main control means, when corrected by the main time data or the correction means, the main change rule table group composed of a plurality of change rules by the main change rule determination means based on the corrected main time data. To 1 main change rule table is determined. In the slave control means, the slave change rule table group configured in the same manner as the master change rule table group by the slave change rule determination means based on the slave time data after correction based on the slave time data or correction means. One sub change rule table is determined from among them. Then, by correcting at least one of the main time data and the subordinate time data by the correcting means, the same change rule is determined by the main change rule determining means and the sub change rule determining means.

  Thereby, in the main change rule table determined by the main change rule determination means and the sub change rule table determined by the sub change rule determination means, at least one of the main time data and the sub time data is corrected by the correction means. Thus, the same change rule can be determined without notifying a signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main change rule determining unit and the sub change rule determining unit. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and a regular specific There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the slave control signal from being grasped and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. In other words, the main control means measures time even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main time measuring means, and the main time acquisition means acquires main time data from the main time measuring means. Further, the slave control means measures time even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave time means, and the slave time data acquisition means acquires the slave time data from the slave time means.

  At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means determines the timing at which the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means respectively acquire the main time data and the subordinate time data at the same timing by the synchronization determination means. . Thereby, the master time data acquisition means acquires the master time data at the timing determined by the synchronization judgment means, and the slave time data acquisition means acquires the slave time data, so that the master time data and slave time data of the same value are obtained. Can be obtained.

  Then, in the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, one change rule is determined from a plurality of change rules based on the main timing data acquired at the timing by the main change rule determining means. Further, in the sub control means, one change rule is determined from the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data acquired at the timing when the sub change rule determination means is determined by the synchronization determination means.

  As a result, the change rule is determined based on the main time data and the subordinate time data of the same value, so a signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main change rule determining means and the sub change rule determining means is notified. The same change rule can be determined without it. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and a regular specific There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the slave control signal from being grasped and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the game operation suggestion effect which alert | reports that the 1st normal electric combination act | operates, (b) is the game operation suggestion which alert | reports that the 2nd normal electric combination act | operates It is the figure which showed the production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the composition of various counters, a special symbol reservation ball storage area, a special symbol reservation ball execution area, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area, and a normal symbol reservation ball execution area. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a random symbol table 202c per ordinary symbol. It is the figure shown in. (A) is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for jackpots, (b) is the figure which showed typically the variation pattern table for losing. (A) is the figure which showed typically the special symbol removal stop pattern selection table, (b) is the figure which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern table (normal pattern) typically, (c) is normal It is the figure which showed the stop classification table for symbols typically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a processing condition setting table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a continuous lottery table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a game action suggestion lottery table 222b. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the predetermined bit inversion system in command processing, (b) is the figure which showed typically the rotation system of another Example in command processing. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process in change performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the command processing process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the continuous lottery process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) showed the game operation suggestion lottery process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of factory shipment performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st and 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is typical about the content of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (C) is the figure which showed typically the process condition setting table memorize | stored in ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (d) is 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the list of the special removal commands in a form. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process condition update process 1 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command processing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process condition setting process 1 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition setting process 1 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition update process 1 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process A before decision performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM in the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is in other memory areas of RAM203 in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed a part typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process condition update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the large opening opening / closing process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a change performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process condition setting process 1 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition setting process 1 performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process condition update process 1 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition update process 1 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process condition update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub process condition update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1 to FIG. 30, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the contents of the super reach effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first entrance 63, The second entrance 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first entrance 63, the second entrance 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent a situation where the ball guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 are in a normal state in which the blades of the first ordinary electric combination 63 a and the second ordinary electric combination 64 a are closed (the blade is upward). In the state of standing up), the nails are arranged so as to block the openings so that the game balls do not enter the upper part of the openings where the game balls formed between the facing blades can enter. Therefore, the player first fires a game ball so that the game ball passes through the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b.

  When the game ball passes through the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for a game ball passing to the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b, whether or not a normal symbol is hit is determined, and when it is determined to be out Is judged whether or not it is special. When it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, the first ordinary electric accessory 63a is activated and the game ball is moved to the first ball entrance 63 when the result of the lottery for the game ball that has passed through the third ball entrance 67a is obtained. Moves from a state in which the blades of the first ordinary electric accessory 63a, which makes it difficult to enter the ball, to stand substantially vertically, move to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) and enter the first entry port 63 for a predetermined time (this In the embodiment, 1.2s) The game ball is ready to enter. On the other hand, if it is the lottery result for the game balls that have passed through the fourth entrance 67b, the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is activated, making it difficult for the game balls to enter the second entrance 64. 2 From the state in which the blades of the ordinary electric accessory 64a stand substantially vertically, the movable ball moves to a substantially V shape (reverse C shape), and a game ball is placed in the second entrance 64 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). You can enter the ball.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 83, and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed. Normal symbols are stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device 88, the number of passages is the third entrance. Up to four times are held for each of the mouth 67a and the fourth entrance 67b, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the normal symbol hold display portion of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Also shown at 84.

  On the normal symbol hold display portion 84, a hold symbol (for example, ●) representing one hold at a time is displayed. The reserved symbols for the third entrance 67a and the reserved symbols for the fourth entrance 67b are displayed in the same reserved design, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of passing through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b without distinction. Are displayed in order from the left. Up to eight reserved symbols, which are the sum of the maximum number of reserved balls of the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b, are displayed at maximum. When the variation display is ended in the second symbol display section 83 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b, the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance If the number of reserved balls for 67b remains, the next normal symbol lottery will be performed for the first hold with respect to the hold of the 3rd entrance 67a and the 4th entrance 67b, and that The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of times that the game ball has passed through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b is set to 4 times, but is not limited thereto. Or five or more times.

  As described above, the reserved symbols displayed on the normal symbol hold display section 84 are the same reserved symbols for the third entrance port 67a and the fourth entrance port 67b. Is configured such that it is difficult to recognize which one of the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b is reserved. Further, the symbols of the second symbol display section 83 and the second symbol display device 88 on which the lottery of the normal symbols at the third and fourth entrances 67a and 67b is variably displayed are the third entrance 67a and the second entrance. It is common to the four entrances 67b, and the player can select the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b from the display symbols displayed on the second symbol display part 83 and the second symbol display device 88. It is usually difficult to recognize which normal symbol lottery is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, the same holding symbol is used for the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b. However, the holding design for the third entrance 67a is different from that for the fourth entrance. May be a slightly different design to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify. For example, the diameter of “●” may be slightly different, or the length of the short axis or long axis may be slightly different by using an elliptical pattern. Moreover, you may comprise so that a hue may differ a little. Further, the second symbol display section 83 where the lottery of the normal symbols at the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b is variably displayed, and the display symbol (ordinary symbol) of the second symbol display device 88 is the third symbol. The common design is the same for the ball entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b, but the normal design displayed for the third entrance 67a and the normal design displayed for the fourth entrance 67b. You may make it vary so that a player may be difficult to identify. For example, the size of the symbol “☆” may be slightly different, or the length of “−” may be slightly different. Further, the display design may be made different by giving a change in the hue such as making the color different by an approximate color.

  By configuring in this way, in a normal game, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the player is the lottery for the game ball passing through the third entrance 67a, It is not possible to determine whether it was a lottery for a game ball passing through the four entrances 67b (or it is difficult to determine). For this reason, it cannot be determined which of the first ordinary electric accessory 63a and the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is opened, and whether the entry entrance capable of entering the ball is the first entrance 63 or the second entrance Whether the mouth 64 is present cannot be determined. Therefore, the player receives the normal symbol and displays the symbol (in this embodiment, “☆” is displayed on the second symbol display portion 83), and then the first ordinary electric accessory 63a or the second ordinary electric accessory. After 64a is activated, the entrance that has made it possible to enter is determined, and the game ball is launched toward the entrance.

  On the other hand, the operating time of the first ordinary electric accessory 63a and the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is set to be short (in this embodiment, “1.2 s”). It is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 64. Therefore, it can be configured such that a game ball cannot easily enter the first entrance port 63 and the second entrance port 64 at normal times.

  When the first ordinary electric accessory 63a or the second ordinary electric accessory ball 64a is activated and a game ball enters the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) A lottery will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a hit, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses, Alternatively, the ball is released (until 10 balls are won), and the release is repeated 5 times or 15 times (5 rounds or 15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, firstly, the third entrance port 67a and the fourth entrance port 67b through which the player launches the game ball and passes the game ball are provided side by side above the game area. It has been. The first entrance 63 is arranged on the left side of the center of the game area, and the second entrance 64 is arranged on the right side of the center of the game area. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the third entrance port 67a and the fourth entrance port 67b, the first entrance port 63 or the second entrance port 64 has a predetermined time. (1.2 seconds in this embodiment) Open. Since the display of the normal symbol hold display portion 84 is a display that is difficult to identify whether it is the hold ball of the third entrance 67a or the hold ball of the fourth entrance 67b, Without knowing which entrance should be aimed until the first ordinary electric accessory 63a or the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is actuated, it will aim at the entrance after the electric accessory is activated, It is difficult for a game ball to enter the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64.

  However, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, determines that “special out” as a result of the normal symbol lottery, the main control device 110 outputs a special out command to the sound lamp control device 113. When 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to make a game action suggestion setting. If it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is set by lottery of the game action suggestion setting, the first entry hole 63 or the second entry hole 64 that can enter the ball in the variation mode that is a normal symbol win. The third symbol display device 81 displays an effect (a game operation suggesting effect, which will be described later) for notifying either of the above.

  By this game action suggestion effect, the player can know in advance the entrance that can enter the game, and easily enter the game ball into the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. Will be able to.

  It should be noted that the jackpot lottery probability of a special symbol that is drawn based on the game balls entering the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 is 10/11 as shown in FIG. 8B. is there. On the other hand, the winning lottery probability of the normal symbol that is drawn based on the game balls passing through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b is 1/100 as shown in FIG. 8 (d). . Thereby, the special symbol jackpot probability is set high with respect to the normal symbol, and when a game ball enters the first entrance 63 or the second game ball 64, the player can expect more jackpots. It has become.

  Therefore, it is a great advantage for the player to be notified of the entrance to be able to enter by the game operation suggesting effect.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of entrances is not suspended and becomes invalid. Note that the first special prize opening 65a opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is below the first ball opening 63, and the second special prize opening 650a is below the second ball opening 64. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls is not provided for entering the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64, but the number of reserves is not limited to this. (4 times, 8 times, etc.).

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. When “Big Jack A” or “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack A” is a special gaming state with 15 rounds (15R big jack), and “Big Jack B” is a special gaming state with 5 rounds (5R Jackpot).

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by indicating whether or not the variation is being performed in accordance with the entry to the first entry port 63 or the second entry port 64 (start winning prize). As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 The number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved sphere) (not used because the reserved sphere is set to 0 in the first embodiment) is indicated by the lighting state. It is. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64, whether or not a big hit is determined (a big win lottery) is determined, and a big win is determined. If determined, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R jackpot and 5R jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “15R jackpot” means a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “5R jackpot” means a maximum round of five.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third ball entry in the first ball inlet 63 or the second ball inlet 64 (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, while The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that displays symbols in a variable manner and the passage of a sphere at the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b are used as triggers. There is provided a second symbol display unit 83 configured by LEDs for variably displaying the second symbol. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later. When the lottery result is a jackpot, a variation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variation display ends.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 displays the 3rd symbol variably, or the normal symbol hold display section. The main display area Dm of 84 and the other upper third are sub display areas Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, a normal symbol, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right and the normal symbol display section 84. Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, in the normal symbol hold display section 84, the sphere is in the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance while the second symbol display device 83 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display. When entering the ball 67b, the number of times of entering the ball is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the normal symbol hold display portion 84 of the main display area Dm. It is. In the normal symbol holding display section 84, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each one of the reserved ball numbers of the third entrance port 67a or the fourth entrance port 67b, and the number of the reserved ball number symbols is displayed. , The number of held balls is displayed. The reserved symbol for the third entrance 67a and the reserved symbol for the fourth entrance 67b are displayed in the same reserved symbol (for example, ●), and the third entrance port 67a and the fourth entrance port 67b are respectively passed in order. The reserved symbols are displayed in order from the left without distinction.

  That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the normal symbol hold display section 84, it indicates that the number of held balls is one ball, and when eight reserved ball number symbols are displayed, there is a hold Indicates that the number of balls is eight. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed on the normal symbol hold display portion 84, it indicates that the number of held balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the sub display area Ds, a moving image such as a character is displayed in the small areas Ds1 to Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. Usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears, etc. Is done. Since the second symbol display unit 83 is moved and displayed in the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 depending on the gaming state, the characters and the like are displayed using the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 that are not used as the second symbol display unit 83. Will be displayed.

  As described above, since the character or the like is moved and displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the second symbol display unit 83 from being hindered. In addition, since the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 of the third display device 81 on which characters and the like are displayed are displayed next to the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 serving as the second symbol display unit 83, they are displayed on the second symbol display unit 83. Based on the lottery result of the normal symbol to be displayed, a notice effect for notifying the lottery result or the like of the normal symbol variably displayed by the character or the like can be performed during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol variably displayed.

  In a normal state in which a game action suggestion setting, which will be described later, is not set, a normal symbol is variably displayed in the central small region Ds2. A normal symbol is a display mode (“☆” in the present embodiment) that represents a win and a display mode (“-” in the present embodiment) that represents a deviation, and the predetermined variation time (for example, 20 s) has elapsed. Then, the normal symbol based on the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the game action suggestion setting state in which the game action suggestion setting is made, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the normal symbol variation display is displayed in the left small region Ds1 or the right small region Ds3 ( Hereinafter, this display mode is referred to as “game action suggestion effect”). Specifically, in the case of a variable display for a game ball passing through the third entrance 67a, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the left small area Ds1 (corresponding to a game action suggesting effect). Then, by the game action suggesting effect, when the player wins, the first entrance 63 can enter (the first ordinary electric accessory 63a attached to the first entrance 63 operates). Determine. On the other hand, in the case of the variable display for the game ball passing through the fourth entrance 67b, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small area Ds3 on the right side. (Applicable to game action suggestion effect). Then, by the game action suggestion effect, when the player wins, the second entrance 64 can enter (the second ordinary electric accessory 64a attached to the second entrance 64 operates). Determine.

  In this way, when the game action suggesting effect is made, the player can discriminate the ordinary electric actor that operates in advance, and even if the operation time of the ordinary electric actor is short, By aiming at the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 that is opened by the operation of the electric accessory, the game ball can be entered into the entrance more easily.

  In other words, the game operation suggesting effect indicates the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 where the game ball can enter. When a game action suggestion effect is made, the player quickly gets bored with playing the game because the game ball is not monotonous by firing the game ball toward the entrance where the game action suggestion effect notifies. Can be prevented.

  Further, the game action suggesting effect is not limited to the movement of the position of the second symbol display unit 83, but is notified by voice or the like (for example, “right” or “left” is indicated by voice). Alternatively, a notification may be given by a lamp or the like (for example, the first entrance 63 is indicated when the blue lamp is lit, and the second entrance 64 is indicated when the red lamp is lit), characters, etc. (For example, the opening entrance to be opened such as “first entrance 63” and “second entrance 64” is indicated by characters) may be displayed for notification.

  When the game action suggesting effect is made, the player can grasp in advance the entrance to be aimed at, which is advantageous compared with the case where the game action suggesting effect is not made. 64 can enter the game ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that the entrance to the 3rd entrance 67a or the 4th entrance 67b might be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, the maximum number of reserve balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display unit 83 displays a symbol “☆” and a symbol “−” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b. The variable display is alternately turned on. The pachinko machine 10 has a first entrance port 63 or a second entrance port 64 corresponding to a case where the variable display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “☆”). Is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of passing game balls of each of the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the normal symbol hold display. The part 84 is also lit up. The normal symbol hold display section 84 is provided for eight of the maximum number of holds of the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the normal symbol hold display unit may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). ) May be set. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the 1st symbol display apparatus 37, it is good also as what does not perform a lighting display by a normal symbol hold | maintenance display part.

  On both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 63 and a second entrance 64 through which a sphere can enter are respectively provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64, a first entrance 63 switch or a second entrance 64 switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is provided. When the first entrance 63 switch and the second entrance 64 switch are turned on, the main controller 110 makes a big lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. LED 37a. In addition, the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 is also one of the winning entrances in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A horizontally variable first variable winning device 65 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is disposed below the first ball entrance 63, and a horizontally variable second variable winning device 650 having a horizontally long rectangle is disposed below the second ball entering port 64. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning port 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning port 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is set to open and close when a special symbol is won based on winning in the first ball opening 63, and the first specific winning port 65a is set for a predetermined time or a predetermined time. It is released until the condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won). The second variable winning device 650 is set to open and close when a special symbol is won based on winning the second winning slot 64, and until the second specific winning slot 650a satisfies a predetermined time or a predetermined condition is satisfied. (In this embodiment, it is released until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first variable winning port 65 or the second variable winning port 650 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a or the second variable winning port 650a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis on the front side. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing. The first specific winning port 65a or the first specific winning port 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Then, it operates to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display unit 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display unit 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbols (the second symbol display unit 83, the second symbol display device 88), and the second initial value is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. A random number counter CINI2 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17). It is updated periodically and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c in which each counter value is stored for the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 or the second ball inlet 64. In the present embodiment, no holding ball is set at the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64. Therefore, a game ball is placed in the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 during a period when the special design can be drawn, such as when the special design is not changing or when the special design is not a big hit game. When the ball enters the ball, each counter value corresponding to the ball entrance that has entered the ball is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 during a period when the special design is not possible, such as during the change of the special design or during the jackpot game of the special design, Each counter value or the like is not acquired for the entered entrance, and only the winning balls (in this embodiment, 5 gaming balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, no holding ball is set for the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64, but each counter value is stored for the entrance to the first entrance 63. A special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a comprising four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided. Similarly, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for entering the second entrance 64 is provided. ing. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball storage area 203b are not used because the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 is not set in this embodiment. However, when changing to a specification for setting a predetermined number of holding balls, the specification can be easily changed. When the number of balls to be held is set, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first one are set in each of these areas in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. Each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

  In addition, although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i (holding first 1) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of the game ball to the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b. To 8th area) and one normal symbol holding ball execution area 203j.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 109) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 109 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 109). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 109, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 109. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the ball wins (starts) the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. It is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for the big hit is set by the big hit random number table (FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table. A jackpot is determined when it matches the value of a random jackpot (winning value).

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1-byte loop counter in the range of 0-109. In the first per-random number counter C1, the number of random-number values (hit values) that are big hits is 100, and the value “0 to 99” is stored in the big hit random number table.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. It is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing of (start winning).

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of place, the variation pattern in the variation effect, the stop symbol Type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c is a random number, the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table stored in the ROM 202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8B schematically shows an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8C schematically shows an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8C) is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, the jackpot type includes “15R jackpot” with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and “5R jackpot” with a maximum number of rounds of five.

  In the jackpot type table, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8C, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the jackpot A (15R jackpot), and the first hit type counter with respect to the jackpot B (5R jackpot). C2 values “40 to 99” are associated with each other.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is the big hit type table. Determined from. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “45”, the jackpot type is determined. Jackpot B (5R jackpot) is determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot type table is selected so that the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is selected with a probability of approximately 40% and the 5R jackpot is selected with a probability of 60% in the case of the jackpot. It is prescribed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, a special symbol removal stop pattern selection table 202f is set. The stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Reach” (98, 99), “Reach other than front / rear detachment” (range between 90 and 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after reach occurs, and “Completely disengage” where no reach occurs Three stop (production) patterns (range 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins (starts) at the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. At the timing of winning a prize, it is stored in the special symbol 1 special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17). Is done.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes, as a variation pattern table, a variation pattern table 202d for jackpots used when a special symbol is hit, a variation pattern table 202e for removal used when a special symbol is lost, and a normal symbol hit or special loss A variation pattern table (ordinary symbol) 202g used for detachment is prepared.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 d stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d, the 15R jackpot that is referred to when the 15R jackpot (jackpot A) and 5R jackpot (jackpot B) are determined as the jackpot type is determined. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the 5R jackpot (bonanza B) dedicated to the reference when the 15R jackpot (bonanza A) and 5R jackpot are determined. The values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area, the execution area The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is determined from the variation pattern for jackpot.

  The 15R jackpot includes 15R normal reach types, 15R super reach types, and 15R special reach types, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for 15R normal reach types, 51 to 150 for 15R super reach types, Various types of 15R special reach are 151-198. The 15R Nord Reach is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the 1st symbol (or the 3rd symbol) is aligned (so-called bite-stopped symbols are aligned). Is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach), and various types of 15R special reach are from super reach This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a longer variation time (for example, a reach that further develops after super-reach or a special reach in which the development destination from normal reach is different from super reach).

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  Like the 15R jackpot, the 5R jackpot has 5R normal reach types, 5R super reach types, 5R special reach types, and the correspondence with the value of the variable type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for the 5R normal reach types and 5R super reach types. Are 51 to 150, and 5R special reach is 151 to 198. The 5R Nord Reach is a reach that has a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter-stopped pattern is aligned). Is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach, etc.). This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a longer variation time (for example, a reach that further develops after super-reach or a special reach in which the development destination from normal reach is different from super reach).

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table 202 e for removing special symbols stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9B, the variation pattern table 202e for detachment is used only for complete detachment that is referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common to be referred to when determined and the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. Yes. If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is not a big hit value (a win value), that is, a value that is out of the game, and the gaming state is in a low probability state during normal times, the first per-random number In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same execution area as the counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is the change pattern for detachment. Determined from table 202e.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a complete detachment variation pattern in which variation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198, that is, a special symbol detachment stop pattern selection table. In all cases where the perfect deviation is selected at 202f (see FIG. 10A), the complete deviation variation mode is selected. In addition, for reach, the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short and the normal reach is various, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, and the special that is longer than the super-reach. There are various types of reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for various types of outliers, 149 to 190 for various types of outliers, and 191 to 198 for various types of outliers.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

  FIG. 10B is a diagram schematically showing a normal pattern variation pattern table 202 g stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the normal hit fluctuation pattern selected when the normal symbol lottery result is a win, and the special outlier fluctuation pattern selected when the normal symbol lottery result is a special loss. The normal symbol lottery result is configured to be out of the fluctuation pattern selected. That is, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, only one variation pattern of normal symbols is used for each lottery result. However, the variation pattern is not limited to that, and can be selected from a plurality of patterns based on the counter value, like the variation pattern of special symbols. It may be a thing.

  The second random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8D) is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within a range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). . The ball is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the third entrance port 67a or the fourth entrance port 67b. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol (FIG. 8 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number that is the winning set by the normal symbol random number table 202c.

  When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and the third ball entry 67a or the fourth ball entry 67b (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. ) Is obtained when it is detected that the data has passed. The number of random number values to be won is 3, and the range is “5-7”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 7”, it is determined that the winning is made, and the symbol “☆” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display unit 83. Is displayed, and the lottery result in the passage of the game ball with respect to the passage of the game ball with respect to the third entrance 67a, the lottery result in the passage of the game ball with respect to the fourth entrance 67b, the first entrance 63 The second entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17).

  FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing a processing condition setting table 202i stored in the ROM 202 as shown in FIG. In a command processing process (FIG. 14, S114) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, the command is changed by one of the command changing methods (setting A to setting C) shown in FIG. Is generated. The command changing method is determined by setting the machining conditions determined based on the machining condition setting table 202 i shown in FIG. 11A and the set random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 260. Specifically, if the value of the set random number value is in the range of “0 to 84”, the setting A (the lower third bit is inverted), and if it is in the range of “85 to 169”, the setting B (lower 4 bits) If the range is “170 to 255”, the setting C (invert the lower fifth bit) is selected. Specifically, if the third bit from the bottom (FIG. 12 (a) hatched portion) is “1”, it is inverted to “0”, and if the third bit from the bottom is “0”, it is inverted to “1”. Command is generated. Setting a condition for processing a command in this way (setting to invert a specific bit) is referred to as determining (changing) a command generation method.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically showing a machining condition setting table 202 i of another embodiment stored in the ROM 202. In the command processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 described later (FIG. 14, S114), instead of the changing method (setting A to setting B) shown in FIG. 12A, shown in FIG. You may comprise so that a command may be produced | generated by the change method (setting A-setting B) of a command. The command changing method is determined by the setting determined based on the processing condition setting table 202 i shown in FIG. 11A and the set random number value acquired from the random number generation circuit 260. Specifically, if the value of the set random value is in the range of “0 to 84”, the setting A (rotates to the left by 1 bit), and if it is in the range of “85 to 169”, the setting B (2 bits) If it is in the range of “170 to 255”, setting C (rotate 3 bits to the left) is selected. Specifically, in the setting A, in the 8-bit command, the lower 1st bit to the 8th bit are rotated (moved) by 1 bit to the left, so the value of the 1st bit moves to the 2nd bit, 2nd bit value moves to 3rd bit, 4th bit value moves to 5th bit, 6th bit value moves to 7th bit, 7th bit value moves to 8th bit Then, the value of the eighth bit moves to the first bit and a command is generated. Setting the processing conditions for processing the command in this way (setting A to setting B) is referred to as determining (changing) the command generation method (change method).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display section 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (S1000) (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 16). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e, and a normal symbol. It has at least a reserved ball number counter 203f, a normal symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203g, a normal symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203h, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i, a normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203j, and other memory counters 203k. .

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are not used because the reserved balls are not set for the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 in this embodiment. This is a spare area set for use when the specification is changed so that a holding ball is set. In the specification in which the holding ball is set, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) upon detection of the start winning. This is a memory for storing each value of CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a winning (start winning) in the first interruption slot 63 during the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. Acquired and stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, the first per-type counter storage area 203a2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second entrance 64 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the first per-random number counter in the reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained. The data is stored in the storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b can store (hold) data corresponding to one start winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) up to four times. And four holding areas.

  Further, the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c stores each counter value based on the start winning, and the special symbol jackpot lottery or the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in the processing such as setting.

  Note that in this embodiment, there is no holding ball set for a special symbol start winning, so when a start winning is made in a period during which a special symbol can be drawn (a period during which the special symbol changes or a big hit game is omitted). It is directly stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. On the other hand, in the specification for setting the holding ball for the start winning, when the MPU 201 detects the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the jackpot lottery or the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is set. In order to execute the processing such as the above, the data corresponding to the start winnings stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) ), The data corresponding to one start winning prize is shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are not used because there are no reserved balls for the first and second inlets 63 and 64 in this embodiment. Entry to the first entry slot 63 or the second entry slot 64 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”) The counters that count the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37, respectively, up to four times each. is there. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S917 in FIG. 16). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of held balls) is that the game ball has entered the first entrance 63 in the specification in which the reserved ball is set for the start winning. When the counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 1 holding ball number command output from the main control board. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. . In the present embodiment, since the reserved ball is not set for the start winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not used.

  Further, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of held balls) is that the game ball has entered the second entrance 64 in the specification in which the reserved ball is set for the start winning. When the counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. . In the present embodiment, since the reserved ball is not set for the start winning, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not used.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6 again, details of the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c will be described. The special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type In addition, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of losing, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol at the time of big hit are used. The special symbol holding ball execution area 203c is the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64. Each value is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. The special symbol holding ball execution area 203c includes a first per-random number counter storage area 203c1, a first per-type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4. Yes.

  When each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, the MPU 201 stores the data stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Then, referring to the variation start process (see FIG. 20), a lottery lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f plays the third entrance hole 67a or the fourth entrance port 67b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the passing of the ball (hereinafter referred to as “start winning prize”), the fluctuating effect (the second symbol display unit 83 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 88) performed in the first symbol display device 37. Is a counter that counts up to 4 times each of the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect performed in step 1). The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls that the game ball has passed through the third entrance port 67a or the fourth entrance port 67b. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S917 in FIG. 23). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of the suspended balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 8. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed (see S309 in FIG. 23).

  The normal symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203g is based on starting winning at the third entrance 67a detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect (the variation effect performed by the second symbol display unit 83 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is maximized. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203g is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S917 in FIG. 23). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4.

  The normal symbol 2 held ball number counter 203h is based on starting winning at the fourth entrance 67b detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The maximum number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect (the variation effect performed by the second symbol display unit 83 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is maximized. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203h is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S917 in FIG. 16). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i includes a second per-random number counter C4 and a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the third and fourth entrances 67a and 67b. This is a memory for storing first and second normal symbol flags indicating which of the 3 entrance holes 67a and the 4th entrance 67b the start entry is made. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed (start winning prize) to the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the MPU 201 receives the second hit from the counter buffer. The value of the random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203i1 of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, if it passes through the third entrance 67a (start winning prize), the first normal symbol flag is stored (stored) in the first and second normal symbol flag storage areas 203i2. On the other hand, if it passes through the fourth entrance 67b (start winning prize), the second normal symbol flag is stored (stored) in the first and second normal symbol flag storage areas 203i2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i has eight holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the first or second normal symbol flag) can be stored (held) up to eight times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, the data of the holding ball is digested in the holding area where the data is vacant in the order of passing (start winning prize) to the third ball inlet 67a or the fourth ball inlet 67b. They are stored in order from the reservation area with the earlier order.

  Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203j stores each counter value based on the start winning, and the game ball big hit lottery or the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation effect, the MPU 201 performs processing such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 83 or the second symbol display device 88. Of the data corresponding to the respective start winnings (value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203j. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The other memory area is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to a random number generation circuit 260 configured with an 8-bit counter IC and a flash memory 261. The random number generation circuit 260 has a built-in clock signal generation circuit that generates a clock signal. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and power for operating the random number generation circuit 260 is supplied, the MPU 201 Regardless of the state, update of the counter value is started. Since the counter is an 8-bit counter, the update range of the counter value is “0 to 255”. When starting the operation, the initialization of the random number generation circuit 260 is not performed, so that the initial value for starting the update of the random number is random, and the update of the counter value is started from an indefinite value.

  In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit 260 is configured by an 8-bit counter IC. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured by a 16-bit counter IC. good.

  The flash memory 261 is a nonvolatile semiconductor memory in which data is not lost even when the power is turned off, and is configured by a NAND flash memory. It is connected so that data from the MPU 221 can be read and written. The flash memory 261 is provided with a machining condition setting storage area 261a, which is an area for storing command machining condition settings, which will be described later. The flash memory 261 is not initialized even when a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) of the pachinko machine 10, which will be described later, is turned on and the RAM 203 is initialized, and the flash memory 261 is not initialized, and the machining condition setting storage area 261a. The setting of the machining conditions stored in is held.

  As described above, since the processing conditions are set to be stored in the processing condition setting storage area 261a of the flash memory 261, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on and the RAM 203 is initialized. Also, it is possible to prevent the processing conditions from being erased. Further, since the flash memory 261 provided separately from the RAM 203 is used, fraud countermeasures are applied to the flash memory even when the flash memory is illegally accessed to extract the processing condition settings. It can be simple, and the countermeasures against fraud can be simplified.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided separately from the RAM 203 for reading / writing other data, the number of data reading / writing operations is reduced compared to the RAM 203, the flash memory 261 is damaged, and the setting of the processing conditions is erased. Such problems can also be suppressed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display portion 83, a normal symbol hold display portion 84, a first specific winning opening 65a, and a second specific winning prize. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the port 650 a as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. The MPU 201 is connected via an input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  A flash memory 262 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The flash memory 262 is a nonvolatile semiconductor memory in which data is not lost even when the power is turned off, and is configured by a NAND flash memory. It is connected so that data from the MPU 221 can be read and written. The flash memory 262 is provided with a machining condition setting storage area 262a, which is an area for storing command machining condition settings, which will be described later. The flash memory 262 is not initialized even when a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) of the pachinko machine 10, which will be described later, is turned on and the RAM 203 is initialized, and the flash memory 262 is not initialized and the machining condition setting storage area 262a. The setting of the machining conditions stored in is held. As described above, the machining conditions are set so as to be stored in the machining condition setting storage area 262a of the flash memory 262. Therefore, even if the RAM 223 is initialized and the RAM 223 is initialized (S1110). It is possible to prevent the condition from being deleted. In addition, since it is provided separately from the RAM 223, it is only necessary to take illegal countermeasures against the flash memory 262 against unauthorized access to the flash memory 262 to extract the processing condition settings. Preventive measures can be simplified.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided separately from the RAM 223 for reading and writing other data, the number of times data is read and written is smaller than that of the RAM 223, the flash memory 262 is damaged, and the setting of the processing conditions is erased. Such problems can also be suppressed.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, vibration sensor 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the entrance is an important factor for determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a game counter 223d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e, a game operation suggestion setting flag 223f, and other memory areas. 223g at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is not used because the number of reserved balls is not set for the start winning prize, but is used when the specification is changed to a specification in which a reserved ball is set. Is provided. Similar to the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110, it is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the control device 110.

  The variation start flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a variation pattern command of a special symbol or a normal symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 28). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1502 in FIG. 30).

  The game counter 223d is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 255 in this embodiment), returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), and incremented by 1 again. It has become. The value of the game counter 223d is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once every main process (S1200) of the sound lamp control device 113) (see S1212 in FIG. 26), and a game action suggestion lottery process (described later) In S1413), it is acquired in the case of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to set the game action suggestion setting (S1422 in FIG. 29B). It is also acquired when a lottery for determining whether or not to end the game action suggestion setting is performed in the continuous lottery process (S1411) (S1431 in FIG. 29A).

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to eight times the maximum number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable effects that are held in the main controller 110.

  The game action suggestion setting flag 223f is a flag indicating that the game action suggestion setting is set, and is turned on when the game action suggestion setting is set. On the other hand, it is turned off when the game action suggestion setting is not set. It is set to off when the power is turned on. The game operation suggestion lottery process (S1413) is set to ON (see FIG. 29B and S1424), and the continuous lottery process (S1411) is set to OFF (see FIG. 29A and S1433). When the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the gaming action suggestion setting is currently set, it determines whether or not the gaming action suggestion setting is set by determining the gaming action suggestion setting flag 223f.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 223, in addition, a command storage area 223a that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or a variation start indicating that a variation effect should be started in an on state. A flag 223c, and the like.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) circuit 253 is pressed when the power is turned on (while turning on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122)). In this case, the RAM erase signal SG2 is output to the main controller 110 to clear the backup data. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG.11 (c) is the figure which showed typically an example of the continuous lottery table 222a memorize | stored in ROM223 as shown in FIG.11 (b). The continuous lottery table 222a is used to determine whether or not the game action suggestion setting, which will be described later, is continued or not continued (falls) based on the game counter value acquired from the game counter 223d. Specifically, if the game counter value is in the range of “0 to 170”, it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is continued, and if it is in the range of “171 to 255”, it is determined that the game counter value is not continued (falls). The

  FIG. 11D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the game action suggestion lottery table 222b stored in the ROM 223 as shown in FIG. 11B. The game action suggestion lottery table 222b is used to determine whether or not a game action suggestion setting to be described later is set (winning) or not set (off) based on the game counter value acquired from the game counter 223d. Specifically, if the game counter value is in the range of “0 to 127”, it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is set, and if it is in the range of “128 to 255”, it is determined that the game is not continued. The game action suggestion setting lottery is executed when a special out command, which is a stop type command indicating a special out of a normal symbol, is received from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the game motion suggestion setting is made and the player performs the game motion suggestion effect, the player can play the first entrance 63 or the first entry than when there is no game motion suggestion effect. It is possible to easily make a start prize at the two entrances 64. Therefore, when providing the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability that the player can get a big hit is changed by changing the specifications of the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is used as it is, and the game of the audio lamp controller 113 is performed. It is possible to change the specification by creating an operation suggestion setting with a changed probability of being drawn.

  By doing in this way, the main control device 110 is the same, and when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs the lottery of the game motion suggestion setting, the probability that the game motion suggestion setting is set is increased (FIG. 11). By increasing the number of counter values that are won in (d), the player becomes a pachinko machine 10 that is easy to obtain a special symbol jackpot, while reducing the probability that the game action suggestion setting is set. By reducing the number of counter values that are won in FIG. 11 (d), it becomes a pachinko machine 10 where it is difficult for the player to obtain a special symbol jackpot, and the variation of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to the sound lamp control device 113. It can be increased by changing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 with abundant variations can be provided to the game store.

  Further, based on the fact that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 transmits a special failure command, which is a stop type command indicating special failure, to the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 sets the game action suggestion setting. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can determine the timing of the lottery, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 draws the game action suggestion setting at a timing that hinders the game control. Can be prevented.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Therefore, since it is difficult to cheat directly on the control board of the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs a lottery (in this embodiment, a lottery for game operation suggestion setting) that will be beneficial to the player, a harness that connects the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is used. On the other hand, there is a risk of fraud using a substrate called a “hanging substrate”.

  The entire control board is a “hanging board”. A special board is attached to a harness for the main controller 110 to send a command to the audio lamp controller 113, and a specific command is forcibly given to the audio lamp controller 113. Is to send.

  With this “hanging board”, a special out command is forcibly transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 many times. As a result, if the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the special out command is a regular special out command, the MPU 221 executes a lottery of the game operation suggestion setting and may set the game operation suggestion setting. There is.

  However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 also receives a special disconnect command by a startup process (see FIGS. 23 and 911) executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The machining conditions that are generated by the change are set. When the machining condition is set, the machining condition setting is output as a machining condition command to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the MPU of the sound lamp control device 113 can also recognize the command changing method (setting of processing conditions) generated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Since the command processing conditions are set every time the power is turned on to the main control board, the special detach command transmitted is also changed based on the power being turned on. Therefore, even if the special out command is analyzed with a used machine etc. and the analyzed special out command is transmitted by the “hanging board”, the processing conditions set in the pachinko machine 10 installed in the amusement store are different. For example, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured not to determine that the special detach command transmitted by the “hanging board” is a regular special detach command, but to prevent fraud due to the “hanging board”.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is canceled, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after canceling the system reset via the bus line 240 and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and performs display control of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process activated upon power-on, a main process (S1000) executed after the startup process, and periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing to be started and NMI interrupt processing to be started by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described. The startup process and the main process (S1000) will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (S1000), a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes, and is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Remember once. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 18) or the fluctuation start process (FIG. 20), which is one of the fluctuation processes, are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big win state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are opened every round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a has elapsed, or the first It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 88 is executed (S104). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the third entrance port 67a or the fourth entrance port 67b, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol The display device 88 performs the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 is It is opened for a predetermined time. In this case, the variable display of the second symbol display device 88 is displayed in conjunction with a second symbol display unit 83 described later. The same determination result is displayed at the same time. Here, the second symbol display device 88 is the one in which the main control device 110 directly executes the variation display control, and the second symbol display unit 83 displays the normal symbol variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. Based on the display variation pattern command generated by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 performs display control.

  With this configuration, even when the display control device 114 cannot display the second symbol display unit 83 due to a problem or the like, the second symbol display device 88 can display the variation of the normal symbol. In addition, since the second symbol display device 88 is directly controlled by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 uses a command different from the command transmitted by the main control device 110 due to “hanging board” or the like. The second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device are also used when the variation control is performed (when the variation pattern command for display is output to the display control device 114 to control the variation display of the normal symbol). This can be confirmed by comparing the 88 fluctuation displays and stop symbols.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S105). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop-type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, 109, 119, 99, 198, and 299, respectively) are cleared to 0. Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second per-random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S108), and then the first entrance port. 63 or a start winning process associated with winning in the second entrance 64 is executed (S109). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a normal symbol variation process for the game ball passing through the third and fourth entrances 67a and 67b, is executed (S110). A through gate process is executed in response to the game ball passing through the third and fourth entrances 67a and 67b (S111). Details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, and details of the through gate process will be described later with reference to FIG. A firing control process is executed (S112), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S113).

  Next, a command processing process for determining a method for generating a command to be sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 is executed (S114), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Details of the command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In the firing control process (S112), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S109). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 63, and if there is a starting win, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. Execute the process stored in.

  When this starting winning process is executed, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) at the first entrance 63 (S201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 63 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 63 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a start winning period (S202). In the present embodiment, the start winning possible period is set when there is no data stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c (the special symbol lottery is not changing) or when the jackpot game is not being played.

  When it is determined that the start winning period is possible (S202: Yes), the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer. In the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203, the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per-type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are held (stored) (S203). ).

  Next, after various counter values are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, or when it is determined that (S201: No) or (S202: No), a winning (starting) is made at the second entrance 64. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S204). Here, the entrance to the second entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S204: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a start winning period (S205).

  When it is determined that the start winning period is possible (S205: Yes), the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer. In the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c of the RAM 203, the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are held (stored) (S206). ).

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 executes jackpot lottery, determination of the variation pattern, and the like based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. To do. As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c203b are used for jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of execution of a variation effect, determination of a variation pattern, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 are not opened simultaneously. That is, the start winnings at the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 are when the game balls pass through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b and the lottery is won. The normal symbol lottery is executed in the order in which the game balls pass through the third entrance 67a and the fourth entrance 67b. Furthermore, when the normal symbol wins, the period during which the first ordinary electric accessory 63a or the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is activated and the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 can be awarded. Is 1.2 s, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.2 s or more, so there is no period in which the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 are opened simultaneously. For this reason, the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 are not won simultaneously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the normal symbol variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S110). The normal symbol variation process (S110) includes the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83, the first ordinary electric accessory 63a associated with the first entrance 63, the second entrance 64, the second 2 is a process for controlling the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 64a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) or a special symbol, or whether a special symbol is varying (S301). As the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the first ordinary electric accessory associated with the first entrance 63 and the second entrance 64 after the display showing the hit in the second symbol display portion 83 is made. 63a, up to the middle when the opening / closing control of the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is being performed. The hitting special symbol includes the time from the display showing the winning on the third symbol display device 81 to the end of the jackpot game. If the normal symbol (the second symbol) or the special symbol is being hit, or if the special symbol is changing (S301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit, the special symbol is not hit, and the special symbol is not changing (S301: No), the normal symbol of the second symbol display unit 83 is changing. If the normal symbol is not changing (S302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S307). . Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S308), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S308: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S309).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i is shifted (S310). In the process of S310, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved eighth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, hold fifth area → hold The data in each area is shifted such as the fourth area, the reserved sixth area → the reserved fifth area, the reserved seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the reserved eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203i is acquired (S311).

  Next, the first normal hit fluctuation pattern or the second normal hit fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win is selected (S312). Specifically, the variation pattern is selected by determining the flags stored in the first and second normal symbol flag storage areas 203j2. If the flag stored in the first or second normal symbol flag storage area 203j2 is a flag for the first normal symbol, the variation pattern for the first normal symbol is selected. On the other hand, if the flag stored in the first to second ordinary symbol flag storage area 203j2 is a flag for the second ordinary symbol, the second ordinary variation pattern is selected (in the present embodiment, the first ordinary variation fluctuation). In the pattern, the second normal variation pattern, “◯” and “×” are alternately lit for 20 s on the second symbol display device 88. Also, in the second symbol display device, “☆” and “ “-” Is alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that the two types of normal variation hit patterns of the first normal variation pattern and the second normal variation pattern are set for the first normal variation variation pattern and the second normal variation variation pattern. The command is different, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is the result of the lottery when the normal symbol hit passes through the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b. This is to make it possible to determine whether the result is a lottery triggered by the passing of a ball.

  Next, based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S311 and the normal symbol per random number table 202c (FIG. 8D), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired. (S313). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 7”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 8 to 299”, it is normal. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 8D).

  Next, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (S314: Yes), the display mode for winning is set (S315). In the process of S315, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) (“☆” on the second symbol display unit 83). Set so that the symbol is lit.

  Next, the process proceeds to S316, and if the first normal hit variation pattern is set (if the current lottery result is the lottery result for the game ball passing through the third entrance 67a), the first The opening period of the first ordinary electric accessory 64a associated with the 1 entrance 63 is set to 1.2 seconds, and the opening frequency is set to 1. On the other hand, if the second normal hit variation pattern is set (if the current lottery result is the lottery result for the game ball passing through the fourth entrance 67b), it is attached to the second entrance 64. The opening period of the second ordinary electric accessory 64a is set to 1.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S316), and the process proceeds to S317.

  If it is determined in step S314 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S314: No), based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table (Fig. 8 (d)) It is determined whether or not the symbol is specially removed (S318). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number table 202c. If the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “98 to 100”, it is determined that the normal symbol is out of special, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 101 to 299”, the special symbol of the normal symbol is determined. It is determined that it is not off (see FIG. 8D).

  Next, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of normal (S318: Yes), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S319). In the process of S319, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, “×” is displayed on the second symbol display device 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) (“−” on the second symbol display unit 83). Set so that the symbol is lit.

  Next, a special deviation variation pattern is determined when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is special deviation (S320). The first or second normal hit variation pattern determined in S312 is overwritten. (In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation pattern, “◯” and “×” are alternately lit for 20 s on the second symbol display device 88. Also, “☆” is displayed on the second symbol display device for 20 s. And “-” are alternately displayed in a variable manner.) Thereafter, the process proceeds to S317.

  If it is determined in the process of S318 that the normal symbol is not specially removed (S318: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S321). In the process of S321, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, “×” is displayed on the second symbol display device 88 as a stop symbol (second symbol) (“−” on the second symbol display unit 83). Set so that the symbol is lit.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is unacceptable (S322). The first or second normal hit variation pattern determined in S312 is overwritten. (In the present embodiment, the special deviation variation pattern is displayed in the second symbol display device 88 with “◯” and “x” alternately turned on for 20 s. In the second symbol display unit 83, “☆” "And"-"are alternately displayed in a variable manner.) Thereafter, the process proceeds to S317. In S317, the normal symbol variation pattern determined in S312, S320, or S322 is set.

  In the process of S302, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed ( S303). The variation time here is set in advance by the processing of S312, the processing of S320, or the processing of S322 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 83 (second symbol display device 88). It's time.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S303 (S303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S303: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device 88 is set (S304). ). In the process of S304, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S315, the second symbol display device 88 has the “○” symbol as the second symbol, the second symbol display unit 83 is set so that the symbol “☆” is stopped (lighted). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S319 or S321, the second symbol display device 88 as the second symbol is displayed as “x” symbol, second symbol. The display unit 83 is set so that the “-” symbol is stopped (lighted). When stop display is set by the process of S304, the variable display in the 2nd symbol display part 83 and the 2nd symbol display apparatus 88 is complete | finished, and the display mode set by the process of S315, the process of S319, or the process of S321 is completed. Thus, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device 88.

  Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device 88 is the first or second normal variation pattern. (When the change is started, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol change process is a normal symbol win) (S305). If the variation pattern of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display unit 83 and the second symbol display device 88 is the first ordinary hit variation pattern or the second ordinary hit variation pattern (S305: Yes), the first ordinary hit variation If it is a pattern, the opening / closing control start of the 1st normal electric accessory 64a accompanying the 1st entrance 63 is set. On the other hand, if it is the second normal hit variation pattern, the opening / closing control start of the second ordinary electric accessory 64a associated with the second entrance 64 is set (S306). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  When the opening / closing control start of the first ordinary electric combination 63a or the second ordinary electric combination 64a is set by the process of S306, the opening / closing control of the electric combination is started, and the opening time set in the process of S316 and The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the number of times of opening ends. On the other hand, in the process of S305, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S305: No), the process of S306 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S111). This through gate passing process (S111) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the third and fourth entrances 67a and 67b. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the ball has passed.

  In the through gate passing process (S111), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the third entrance 67a (S401). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the third entrance 67a. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the third entrance 67a (S401: Yes), the value of the normal symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times the variable display is held at the third entrance 67a is 1M). Is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (first M) of the normal symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the third entrance 67a (S401: No), or even if the ball has passed through the third entrance 67a, the value (1M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S406. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the third entrance 67a (S401: Yes) and the value of the normal symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203g (first M) is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the normal symbol 1 The value (first M) of the reserved ball number counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the value of the second per-random-number counter C4 updated in S107 of the timer interrupt process described above and the first normal symbol flag are used as an empty reservation area (holding first area to holding) in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203. The first area is stored in the first area (S405). In the process of S405, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area, if the value is 4, the reserved If the value is 5, the reserved area 6 is the reserved area 6. If the value is 6, the reserved area 7 is the first area. If the value is 7, the reserved area 8 is the first area. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the fourth entrance 67b (S406). Here, it is detected over three timer interruption processes that the game ball has passed through the fourth entrance 67b. Then, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the fourth entrance 67b (S406: Yes), the value of the normal symbol 2 reserve ball number counter 203h (the number 2M of the variable display hold at the fourth entrance 67b is held). ) Is acquired (S407). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (second M) of the normal symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S408).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the fourth entrance 67b (S406: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the fourth entrance 67b, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203h (second M ) Is not less than 4 (S408: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the fourth entrance 67b (S406: Yes) and the value (second M) of the normal symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203h is less than 4 (S406: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (second M) of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203h (S409). Then, the value of the second per-random-number counter C4 updated in S107 of the timer interrupt process described above and the second normal symbol flag are used as an empty reservation area (holding first area to holding) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203. The first area is stored in the first area (S410), and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S108). The variation process (S108) controls variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S501). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S502), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. Next, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c (S503). If no data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c (S503: No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S504). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S504: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  If the predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S504: Yes), whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, the demonstration. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S505). In this determination processing, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the time until it is determined that the first winning entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 is determined to have won the start. It is determined that the demo is in progress.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S505: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S506), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S505: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S506 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the process of S503, if data is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c (S503: Yes), a change start process is executed (S507).

  In the process of S502, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S508). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S508: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S509), and it returns to a timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Although the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S508: Yes), the changing process (S510) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the changing process (S510) which is one process of the changing process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this changing process (S510). The changing process (S510) controls the changing effect in the changing effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In the changing process (S510), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S511). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S507) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 Thus, it is determined whether the symbol will be a 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds) or a symbol which will be a 5R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 5 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the big hit is 15R, and the red LED is turned on when the big hit is 5R. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S510, the variation symbol stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm the display, a confirmation command is set (S512), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. Accordingly, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to display the stop symbol by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit for the symbols to be stopped (S513). If it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (out of reach) (S513: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S513: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a 15R jackpot (the value of the first hit type counter C2 is a 15R jackpot) (S514). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a 15R jackpot (S514: Yes), if it is a jackpot based on the lottery result based on the start winning prize to the first ball slot 63, the first variable prize slot 65 On the other hand, various jackpot settings are made for the number of rounds of 15R jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a big win based on the lottery result based on the start winning winning at the second winning entrance 64, various jackpot settings are executed for the number of rounds of 15R jackpot for the second variable winning entrance 650, etc. (S515).

  If it is determined that the current lottery result is a 5R jackpot (S514: No), if it is a jackpot based on the lottery result based on starting winning at the first pitch entry 63, the first variable winning slot 65 On the other hand, various jackpot settings are made for the number of rounds of 5R jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a big win based on the lottery result based on the start winning prize at the second winning entrance 64, various jackpot settings are executed for the number of rounds of 5R big win etc. for the second variable winning opening 650. (S516). Thereafter, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the fluctuation start process (S507) which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S507). This variation start process (S507) performs lottery of “big hit” or “out” based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c (big win lottery) and the first symbol display device 37. And the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) etc. of the fluctuating effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a big hit lottery (win / no go decision) process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c (S601). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, “0 to 99” of the numerical values 0 to 109 of the first random number counter C1 is the winning value (winning value).

  If it is determined as a big win as a result of the process of S601 (S601: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c and the value shown in FIG. Based on the jackpot type table shown, the display mode at the time of jackpot (if 15R jackpot (big hit A), the LED 37a lights a blue LED, if it is 5R jackpot (jackpot B), the LED 37a lights a red LED ) Is set (S602).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c by the jackpot type table, that is, whether the maximum round number is 15R jackpot of 15R, It is determined whether the maximum number of rounds is 5R big hit of 5 rounds. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbol for various jackpots corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is, thereby the third symbol display device. The display mode at the time of jackpot in 81 is set.

  Next, based on the jackpot variation pattern table 202d shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot type determined by the processing of S602 from the various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach, and the special symbol holding ball execution area. A variation pattern at the time of jackpot associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in 203c is determined (S603). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S603, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the symbol pattern is stopped at the jackpot symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S601: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S606). In the process of S606, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c, As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, one of front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detach, and complete detach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S607), and the process proceeds to S604. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the off symbol is determined. At this time, based on the deviation variation pattern table 202e shown in FIG. 9B, the stop type set by the processing of S606 is selected from various kinds of complete deviation, various kinds of normal reach, various kinds of super super reach, and various kinds of special special reach. The variation pattern at the time of detachment associated with the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c is determined.

  In the process of S604, based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the processes of S603 and S607, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the fluctuation pattern type is set via the audio lamp control apparatus 113 (S604). Also, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S602 or S606 is set via the audio lamp control device 113 (S605), and the process returns to the variation processing. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  Next, the command processing (S114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the command processing (S114). This command processing (S114) is processing for determining whether there is a command to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 and changing the command based on the set processing conditions.

  It is determined whether a command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (set in the command transmission ring buffer) (S701). If it is determined that the command is set (S701: Yes), it is determined whether the machining condition set in the process of S911 described later is set A (S702). If it is determined that the setting is A (S702: Yes), the lower byte of the 2-byte command for one command set to be output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 A command generated by inverting the third bit from the bottom is set in the output buffer (S703).

  If it is determined in step S702 that the setting is not A (S702: No), it is determined whether the setting is B (S704). If it is determined that the setting is B (S704: Yes), the lower byte of the 2-byte command for one command set to be output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 A command generated by inverting the fourth bit from the bottom is set in the output buffer (S705).

  If it is determined in step S704 that the setting B is not set (S704: No), two bytes are set for one command set to be output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. A command generated by inverting the fifth bit from the bottom of the lower byte of the command of the configuration is set in the output buffer (S706).

  Next, returning to the processing of S701, it is repeatedly determined whether there is a command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined that there is a command to be output (S701: Yes), the above processing is repeated again. It is determined whether there is a command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S701). If it is determined that there is no command to be output (S701: No), this process is terminated.

  As described above, the command generation method (change method) can be changed by setting the machining conditions. The command that the main control device 110 outputs to the sound lamp control device 113 has a 2-byte configuration of upper (1 byte) and lower (1 byte). The upper byte command is configured so that it can be determined that it is a command of the sound lamp control device 113. The command to be changed by setting the machining condition is a lower byte command. Even if the main control device 110 changes the command generation method based on the machining condition setting, the upper byte command is changed. There is nothing.

  For this reason, even if the command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated (changed) based on the processing condition setting, the same command as that of other control devices (for example, the payout control device 111). The trouble which becomes becomes is prevented. Therefore, even if the main control device 110 outputs a command to all connected control devices, control can be performed without any problems.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, a method of inverting a specific bit is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A method of rotating in a predetermined number of directions may be used.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable, a wait process (S913) (1 second in this embodiment) Is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S605). (S905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally. In this case as well, the process proceeds to S915.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S915. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1007 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S916, S917) after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S916, S917) is executed.

  In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S916, S917), the flash memory 261 is not initialized. Therefore, the machining condition setting storage area 261a in which the machining condition setting (S911 in FIG. 23), which will be described later, is not initialized, and the machining condition setting is also stored.

  Similarly, the initialization processing (S916, S917) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S904: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If it is normal (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the backed up data in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, a set random number value is acquired from the random number generation circuit 260 provided in the main controller 110 (S910). The acquired set random number value is stored in the other memory area 203k of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Next, based on the acquired set random number value, a processing condition is selected and stored in the processing condition setting storage area 262a of the flash memory 262 (S911). Specifically, the machining condition setting is selected (determined) based on the acquired set random number value and the machining condition setting table 202i. If the value of the set random value is in the range of “0 to 84”, the setting A (the lower third bit is inverted), and if it is in the range of “85 to 169”, the setting B (the lower fourth bit is inverted), If it is in the range of “170 to 255”, setting C (invert the lower fifth bit) is selected. Next, a machining condition command based on the setting of the selected machining condition is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S912).

  Next, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the machining condition command, and waits until a time required for completing the start-up process (FIG. 25) performed by the voice lamp control device 113 (S913). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1200) described later.

  As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the processing conditions are set in the startup process (S910 to S911) executed first, and the processing condition command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the game can be executed, the command is generated by changing the processing conditions, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 also receives the command. Can be determined based on the machining condition command.

  Thus, in a state where a game is possible, a special out command, which will be described later, is already changed and output. Therefore, even if the “hanging board” or the like outputs a special disconnect command analyzed by a used machine or the like, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 cannot determine that command as a regular special disconnect command. Accordingly, fraud due to the “hanging board” can be prevented.

  In addition, the random number generation circuit 260 provided in the main control device 110 does not initialize the random number generation circuit 260 when operating when supplied with operable power. It is random and starts updating from an indefinite value. Therefore, the set random number value acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the start-up process is likely to be a random value every time, and the processing conditions selected based on that value are also likely to be random.

  Further, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a processing condition command to the sound lamp control device 113, and then executes a wait process (S913) for waiting for a predetermined waiting time. The waiting time for this wait process (S913) is set longer than the time required from when the machining condition command is output until the sound lamp control device 113 shifts to the main process (S1200). Thereby, in a state where the main control device 110 has shifted to the main processing (S1000) and the game can be started, the audio lamp control device 113 has already executed the main processing (S1200).

  Therefore, even if the game is started, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the normal game command (for example, a variation command) output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 without missing. Thus, normal control processing can be performed.

  When the processing conditions are set, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the processing conditions in the processing condition setting storage area 261a of the flash memory 261. Therefore, the processing conditions are stored independently of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, even if the RAM 203 is illegally accessed, it is possible to prevent the illegality that the processing condition setting is extracted. Even if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on to initialize the RAM 203, it is possible to prevent the processing conditions from being erased. Further, since the flash memory 261 provided separately from the RAM 203 is used, fraud countermeasures are applied to the flash memory even when the flash memory is illegally accessed to extract the processing condition settings. It can be simple, and the countermeasures against fraud can be simplified.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided separately from the RAM 203 for reading / writing other data, the number of data reading / writing operations is reduced compared to the RAM 203, the flash memory 261 is damaged, and the setting of the processing conditions is erased. Such problems can also be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the flash memory 261 is configured to store the setting of the machining conditions, but is not limited thereto, and may be setting information determined based on the setting of the machining conditions. The received machining condition command may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the flash memory 261 is a known flash memory. However, the flash memory 261 is not limited to this, and may be a storage unit that can hold a memory even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (power interruption state). For example, a RAM or the like that has an internal battery or the like and is configured to be able to hold memory for a predetermined time may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process (S1000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1000). In the main process (S1000), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (S1000), first, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1001). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1001: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous timer interrupt process (S1002), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed. (S1002: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the process of determining whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 is repeated.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1002: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached. Update of CINI2 and variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1003, S1004).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1003). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (109, 299 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S107 (S1004), and the process proceeds to the process of S1001.

  Here, the time required for the timer interrupt processing varies depending on the processing contents in the timer interrupt processing, and the remaining time until the predetermined time elapses is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1001, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1001: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1005 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1005), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1006). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1007), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1008), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S1001 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S1003 and S1004 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main process (S1000) of the main controller 110, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, The process can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (S1200) that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1218 (see FIG. 26) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1215 in FIG. 26), it executes a power-off process in S1218. The power-off processing flag is turned on before execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1218 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1218 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1218, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1218, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1218 is executed (see S1217 in FIG. 26). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1218 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process of S1108. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1218 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1200). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  Further, the flash memory 262 is not initialized by the process of S1109. Therefore, the machining condition setting storage area 262a in which machining condition settings are stored is not initialized. Therefore, the processing condition setting is not erased.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1108 is performed via the processes of S1104 to S1106. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110).

  Next, it is determined whether a machining condition command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1111). When it is determined that the machining condition command has not been received (S1111: No), the processing of S1111 is repeatedly executed, and the process waits for reception of the machining condition command from the main control device 110. If it is determined in S1111 that a machining condition command has been received (S1111: Yes), a command machining condition is set (selected) based on the received machining condition command, and the machining condition in the flash memory 262 is set. Store in the setting storage area 262a (S1112). The processing condition commands include a setting A command that specifies setting A, a setting B command that specifies setting B, and a setting C command that indicates setting C. The voice lamp control device 113 includes these processing condition commands. The machining conditions (settings A to C) designated based on the setting are set (selected) and stored in the machining condition setting storage area 262a of the flash memory 262. The interrupt permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1200).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1109 is that when the process from S1104 to S1108 is reached via the process in S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  As described above, until the processing condition command is received from the main control device 110, the process does not proceed to the next main processing (S1200), so the processing conditions cannot be set by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The trouble that a game is started can be prevented. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is not in a playable state, the amusement shop side can notice an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the processing conditions are not set.

  Since the machining condition setting is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 262a of the flash memory 262, the flash memory 262 is initialized even when the initialization is set (S1110) due to destruction of data in the RAM 223 or the like. Therefore, the storage of the machining condition setting storage area 262a is also retained, and the setting of the machining conditions can be prevented from being initialized.

  Furthermore, even if the RAM 223 is illegally accessed, the flash memory 262 is provided independently of the RAM 223, so that it is possible to prevent the processing condition settings from being illegally extracted. As a result, the setting of the machining conditions is extracted, the command changing method is analyzed, and a “special out command” described later by the “hanging board” can be prevented from being illegally output.

  In the present embodiment, the flash memory 262 is configured to store the setting of the machining conditions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be setting information determined based on the setting of the machining conditions. The received machining condition command may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the flash memory 262 is configured by a known flash memory. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any memory means that can retain the memory even when no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (power interruption state). For example, it may be a RAM or the like that has an internal battery or the like and is capable of storing data for a predetermined time.

  Next, the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1200). When the main process (S1200) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process (S1200) was started or since the previous process of S1201 was executed ( S1201) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1213 without performing S1202 to S1211. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the process of S1201 is a process related to display (production) in S1202 to S1211, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1213 and the command determination process of S1214 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1214 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1203 to S1214 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1209 described later are set (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1205, the waiting for customer effect is executed, and then the hold number display update processing is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the number-of-holds counter 223a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1207 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1209), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1210). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1210, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1211). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1212. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1209 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1210 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1212, the game counter 223d of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated (S1212). The game counter 223d is a counter value updated in the range of 0 to 255, and is incremented by 1 each time the processing of S1212 is executed. When the upper limit value 255 is reached, it is returned to 0 and repeatedly updated. The Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1213.

  In the process of S1213, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a discrimination process for discriminating various commands generated by a predetermined change method is executed for the command received from the main controller 110 (S1220).

  The command determination process (S1220) is a process in which the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 starts up a command changed based on the processing condition setting in the command processing (FIG. 14, S114) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The process which changed the command changed based on the process condition command received in (1) to the command before being changed is performed. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1214). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1214 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1215). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1215 (S1215: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1217), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1218). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1219), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1215 (S1215: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1216), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1216: No), the process returns to S1201, and the main process (S1200) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1216: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process (S1200) is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1220) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1220). This command determination process (S1220) is executed in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the processing received from the main control device 110 as described above. A process of returning the command changed based on the condition setting to the command before being changed based on the machining condition command is executed.

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a new command received from the main control device 110 (S1301). If it is determined that there is no new command received from the main control device 110 (S1301: No), this process ends. Then, the process returns to the main process (S1200) (FIG. 26). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new command received from main controller 110 (S1301: Yes), is setting A among command processing conditions stored in processing condition setting storage area 262a of flash memory 262? It is determined (S1302). When it is determined that the setting of the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 262a is stored as the setting A (S1302: Yes), the lower third bit of the lower-order command of the 2-byte command Is inverted and set (stored) in the buffer where the command has been set (stored) (S1303).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting A is not stored (S1302: No), it is determined whether the setting of the processing condition stored in the processing condition setting storage area 262a of the flash memory 262 is the setting B (S1304). ). If it is determined that the setting B is stored (S1304: Yes), the lower 4th bit of the low-order command of the 2-byte command is inverted and set in the buffer in which the command is set (stored). (Store) (S1305). Furthermore, if it is determined that setting B is not stored (S1302: No), the lower 5th bit of the lower command of the 2-byte command is inverted, and the buffer in which the command is set (stored) Is set (stored) (S1306).

  Next, returning to the processing of S1301, it is repeatedly determined whether or not there is a new command received from the main control device 110. If it is determined that there is one (S1301), the above processing is repeated again. If it is determined that there is no new command received from the main controller 110 (S1301: No), this process is terminated.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the process of returning to the command before being changed by the same method as the method of changing the command based on the setting of the machining condition in the command machining process (S114), and thereby the voice. The MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 can determine the content of the received command without performing special processing in the command determination processing described later.

  The method of returning the command before it is changed is appropriately set according to the method of changing the command by the main controller 110, and the main controller 110 is changed by the rotation method as shown in FIG. If it is set to do so, it is possible to return to the command before being changed by using the same number of rotations in the opposite direction rotated by the main controller 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the command content can be determined by returning the command before it is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the changed command and its content are set for each processing condition setting. An associated command determination table may be set, and the received command may be determined based on the processing condition setting and the command determination table.

  Next, a command determination process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1214). This command determination processing (S1214) is executed in the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Determine. Details of the command determination process (S1214) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S1214), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1401). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1403). ). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 30) described later, the display variation for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting pattern commands.

  In the processing of S1403, it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern type is the first ordinary variation pattern or the second ordinary variation pattern (FIG. 10B) (S1404). When it is determined that the extracted variation pattern type is not the variation pattern type related to the first ordinary variation pattern or the second ordinary variation pattern (FIG. 10B) (S1404: No), the main process (S1200) is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern type is a normal hit variation pattern (FIG. 10B) (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether or not a game operation suggestion setting has been made (S1405).

  If it is determined that the game action suggestion setting has been made (S1405: Yes), it is determined in the processing of S1403 whether the extracted variation pattern type is the first normal hit variation pattern (FIG. 10B). (S1420). When it is determined in the process of S1403 that the extracted variation pattern type is the first normal hit variation pattern (FIG. 10B) (S1420: Yes), the first suggested variation pattern type is set (S1406). ). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern type is the first normal variation pattern (FIG. 10B) in S1403 (S1420: No), the second suggested variation pattern type is set. (S1421). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process (S1200).

  Here, the first normal winning variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when the lottery result is a winning result as a result of a lottery when the game ball passes through the third entrance 67a. On the other hand, the second normal winning variation pattern is a variation pattern that is selected when a lottery result is won as a result of a lottery when the game ball passes through the fourth entrance 67b.

  When the game action suggestion setting is set, the selected first suggestion variation pattern type and second suggestion variation pattern type are the display variation patterns transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. one of. Normally, in a state where the game action suggestion setting is not made, the second symbol display section 83 is variably displayed in the small area Ds2, as shown in FIG. 4B, regardless of the lottery result. The

  When the game action suggestion setting is made, the first suggestion variation pattern type set when the first ordinary hit variation pattern is received is displayed in the second symbol display unit 83 as shown in FIG. 5A. This is a display variation pattern that is moved to Ds1 and displayed. As a result, the player can change the normal symbol currently being displayed to the small area Ds1 according to the first suggestion variation pattern type and display the normal symbol. In the case of “☆”), it is determined that the first ordinary electric accessory 63a attached to the first entrance 63 is activated and the first entrance 63a can enter. That is, the first suggestion variation pattern notifies in advance that the first entrance 63 can enter the ball.

  On the other hand, when the game action suggestion setting is made, the second suggestion variation pattern type set when the second normal hit variation pattern is received is displayed on the second symbol display unit 83 as shown in FIG. This is a display variation pattern that is moved to the small area Ds3 and displayed. Thus, the player can move the normal symbol currently being displayed to the small area Ds3 according to the second suggestion variation pattern type and display the normal symbol as a winning symbol (this embodiment). In the case of “☆”), it is determined that the second ordinary electric accessory 64a attached to the second entrance 64 is activated and the second entrance 64a can enter the ball. In other words, the second suggestion variation pattern notifies that the second entrance 64 can enter the ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1407). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1407: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1408).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the stop type extracted in the process of S1408 is a stop type command indicating a special symbol hit (S1409). If it is determined that the stop type extracted in the process of S1408 is a stop type command indicating a special symbol hit (S1409: Yes), it is determined whether or not a game action suggestion setting has been made (S1410). If it is determined that no game action suggestion is set (S1410: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is made (S1410: Yes), the continuous lottery process (S1411) is executed (S1411). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1414. The continuous lottery process (S1411), which will be described later, is a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the game action suggestion setting even after a special symbol hit game.

  If it is determined in step S1409 that the extracted stop type is not a stop type command indicating a special symbol hit (S1409: No), the extracted stop type indicates that the stop type indicates a special outage It is discriminated whether it is a type (S1412). When it is determined that the extracted stop type is not a stop type indicating special deviation (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the extracted stop type is a stop type indicating a special outage (S1412: Yes), a game action suggestion lottery process is executed (S1413). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1414.

  The game action suggestion lottery process (S1413), which will be described later, is a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to set a game action suggestion when a stop type command indicating a special outage is received.

  In the process of S1414, a display stop type command for notifying the display control apparatus 113 of the stop type extracted in the process of S1403 is set (S1411), and the process returns to the main process (S1200). The display stop type command set in the process of S1414 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display controller 114 by the command output process (S1202) of the main process (S1200). Sent.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1407 that a stop type command has not been received (S1407: No), it is then determined whether or not a normal symbol reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1415). . If it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number command has been received (S1415: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 included in the normal symbol reserved ball number command (that is, main control). The number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the normal symbol (second symbol) held in the device 110 is extracted and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1416).

  Here, the normal symbol reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) at the third entrance 67a or the fourth entrance 67b. Every time there is a winning, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1417. Therefore, even if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, The value of the retained ball number counter 223a of the control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the retained ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110.

  Further, after the processing of S1416, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e updated by the processing of S1416 is set (S1417), and the main processing ( Return to S1200). The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1202) of the main process (S1200). Is done. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, a process is performed so that the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may display the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls.

  As a result of the processing of S1415, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1415: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1418).

  Next, the continuous lottery process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the continuous lottery process (S1411).

  The continuous lottery process (S1411) is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 26, S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed by the second symbol display unit 83 as described above. In order to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the game action suggestion setting even after the jackpot game of the special symbol when the game action suggestion setting is set to be displayed. It is processing.

  The game counter value is acquired from the game counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1431). Next, based on the game counter value acquired in S1431 and the continuous lottery table 222a (FIG. 11C), a lottery result indicating whether or not to continue the game action suggestion setting is acquired (S1411). Specifically, the game counter value is compared with the value stored in the continuous lottery table 222a (FIG. 11C). If the game counter value is in the range of “0 to 170”, it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is continued, and if it is in the range of “171 to 255”, it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is to be released (falls).

  If it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is to be continued (S1432: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined not to continue the game action suggestion setting (S1432: No), the game action suggestion setting flag 223f is turned off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29B, the game operation lottery process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the game operation suggestion lottery process (S1413).

  This game operation suggestion lottery process (S1413) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, this process is performed by the main controller 110. Is a process performed when a normal symbol stop type command is received indicating that the determination result of the normal symbol is not special. When the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display unit 83 is a variable display that is a win, it is determined whether or not to set a game motion suggestion setting for performing a game motion suggestion effect. It is a process to do.

  The game counter value is acquired from the game counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1422). Next, based on the game counter value acquired in S1422 and the game action suggestion setting lottery table (FIG. 11D), a lottery result indicating whether or not to set the game action suggestion setting is acquired (S1423). Specifically, the game counter value is compared with the value stored in the game action suggestion lottery table 222b (FIG. 11 (d)). If the game counter value is in the range of “0 to 127”, it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is set (winning). If the game counter value is in the range of “128 to 255”, the game action suggestion setting is not set. ).

  If it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is not to be made (disconnected) (S1423: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game action suggestion setting is set (winning) (S1423: Yes), the game action suggestion setting flag 223f is turned on (the game action suggestion setting is set).

  As described above, when a special out command that is a stop type indicating special out is received from the main controller 110, a game action suggestion setting lottery process is executed, and when it is decided to set a game action suggestion setting in the lottery, An action suggestion is set. When a normal hit fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, is received in a state where the game action suggestion setting is made, the suggested fluctuation pattern type is set. When the suggested variation pattern type is set, in the variation display of the normal symbol based on the normal hit variation pattern, the second symbol display unit 83 is the entry point that triggered the lottery of the normal hit variation pattern from the small area Ds2. By moving to the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the display is changed.

  When the second symbol display unit moves to the small area Ds1, the game action suggesting effect notifies the player that the first entrance 63 can be entered, and the second symbol display unit displays the small area. If it moves to Ds3, the player will be notified that the second entrance 64 can enter the ball. The player can grasp the entrance that can enter the ball by this game operation suggesting effect, and can aim at the entrance and launch the game ball.

  Thus, when the game action suggestion effect setting is set, the player can easily make the first winning entrance 63 or the second entrance 64 start and win.

  Also, when a stop type command indicating a special symbol hit is received, and a game action suggestion setting has been configured, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to continue the game action suggestion setting. Once the game action suggestion setting is made, the game action suggestion setting is continued until the big hit is made once, and the player performs the game action suggestion presentation until at least once the special symbol jackpot is obtained. It is possible to increase the value of the game, and to play a game with the goal of setting a game action suggestion.

  Furthermore, every time you win a special symbol, a lottery will be held as to whether the game action suggestion setting will continue. In addition to the big win, you can enjoy the expectation for the lottery result of the game action suggestion setting. Interest can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game action suggestion setting is configured to continue at least until the special symbol jackpot, but is not limited to this, is the game action suggestion setting continued based on the reception of the special off command again? The lottery may be performed, or the game operation suggestion setting may be canceled without performing the lottery. In addition, when the number of lotteries for a predetermined normal symbol has elapsed, the game action suggestion setting may be canceled. In addition, an opportunity to cancel the game action suggestion setting may be provided as appropriate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the fluctuation display process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation display process (S1213).

  This variation display process (S1213) is executed in the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. In order to display an effect, a variation display process that is a process for generating a variation pattern command for display based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is performed. Run. Further, the display reserved ball number command is used to update the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e in accordance with the display of the variation effect of the normal symbol, and to notify the display controller 114 of the updated normal symbol held ball number. Set.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the main process (S1200). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1502), and the process proceeds to S1503.

  In the processing of S1503, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the processing of S1403 of the command determination processing (FIG. 28, S1214) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503). A display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the processing of S1503 is set (S1504).

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1504 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display controller 114 by the command output process (S1202) of the main process (S1200). Sent. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type acquired in S1503 is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern type (S1505). When it is determined that the variation pattern type acquired in S1503 is not the variation pattern type of the normal symbol (S1505: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (S1200) (FIG. 26). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern type acquired in S1503 is the variation pattern type of the normal symbol (S1505: Yes), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the processing of S1506, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the ordinary symbol holding ball is consumed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the ordinary symbol holding ball is set). The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S1506), and a display for notifying the display controller 114 of the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol indicated by the updated value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223e. A reserve ball number command is set (S1507). The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1202) of the main process (S1200). Is done. And the display control apparatus 114 performs the process which displays on the normal symbol hold | maintenance display part 84 of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 the number of hold ball numbers symbols according to the number of hold balls shown by the display hold ball number command. . Therefore, the player recognizes the number of balls with respect to the held normal symbol by counting the number of reserved balls indicating the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol holding display unit 84 of the third symbol display device 81. can do.

  Note that the control of the display control device 114 is already known and does not show a characteristic configuration of the present invention, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. The display control device 114 receives the display control variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and executes display control of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, based on the special out command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the lottery of the game operation suggestion setting is The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be executed by the MPU 221.

  Here, there is a fraud in which a special disconnect command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 due to “hanging board” or the like. In the case of fraud due to this “hanging board”, etc., the command is analyzed with a second-hand machine, etc., the special out command is grasped by the analysis, and the “hanging board” that can output the grasped special out command is used as a pachinko machine at an amusement store. It is attached to the machine 10 to perform fraud. However, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a process for setting processing conditions for changing and generating a command output from the sound lamp controller 113 is performed. When this processing condition processing is set, a processing condition command based on the determined processing condition setting is also output to the audio lamp control device 113. Based on this processing condition command, it is possible to determine a command that the main control device 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113.

  As a result, even if a special detachment command analyzed from a used machine is output to the sound lamp control device 113 using a “hanging board” or the like, the pachinko machine 10 installed in the amusement store independently sets processing conditions. Since the command change method is changed, the command output from the "hanging board" etc. is recognized as a special out-of-order command if it is set differently from the processing conditions set on the used machine. do not do. Therefore, the game operation suggestion setting lottery process is not executed, and fraud due to the “hanging board” or the like can be prevented.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, each time the power is turned on, a processing condition setting process is performed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is instructed. The case where the machining condition command is transmitted each time has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the machining conditions set in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are set, the determined machining conditions are set in the flash memory 261. Is remembered. Then, a machining condition command based on the decided machining condition is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the machining condition command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the machining condition based on the machining condition command, and the setting of the machining condition is stored in the flash memory 262 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Thereafter, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the main process (S1000), becomes in a state where a normal game is possible, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Then, since the setting of the machining condition is stored in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110, the machining condition is not set in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the machining condition command is also sent to the voice lamp controller 113. Is not output.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment if the setting of the processing conditions is stored in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110. Even if the startup process is executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110, the machining condition is not set, and the machining condition command is not output to the voice lamp control device 113. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. Each process of S901 to S903 is executed in the same manner as each process of S901 to S903 of the first embodiment. When the process of S903 is completed, the process of S918 is executed in the startup process in the second embodiment.

  In the process of S918, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the machining condition is stored in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110 (S918). If it is determined that the setting value of the processing condition is stored in the flash memory 261 (S918: Yes), the process proceeds to S904. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting value of the processing condition is not stored in the flash memory 261 (S918: No), the factory shipping process is executed (S919). As will be described later, this factory shipping process is a process of acquiring a set random number value from the random number generation circuit 260 and determining the setting of the processing conditions based on the set random number value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S904.

  About each process from S904 to S909 and S914 to S917, the same process as each process of S904 to S909 and S914 to S917 of the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the factory shipping process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. A wait process (S913) is executed to wait for a time until the random number generation circuit 260 is updated a predetermined number of times (S931). Next, the set random number value is acquired from the random number generation circuit 260 of the main control device 110, and the acquired set random value is stored in the other memory counter of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.

  Next, the setting of the machining condition is determined based on the acquired set random number value and the machining condition setting table 202i shown in FIG. 11A (S933). A machining condition command based on the determined machining condition setting is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S934).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart for explaining start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Each process from S1101 to S1110 is executed in the same manner as each process from S1101 to S1110 of the first embodiment. When the processing of S1110 is completed, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, processing based on the setting of the processing conditions (processing condition command) in the flash memory 263 of the sound lamp control device 113. It is determined whether the condition setting is stored (S1121). If it is determined that the machining condition setting based on the machining condition setting (machining condition command) is stored in the flash memory 263 (S1121: Yes), the process proceeds to S1113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition setting based on the machining condition setting (machining condition command) is not stored in the flash memory 263 (S1121: No), it is determined whether the machining condition command has been received. (S1122). If it is determined that the machining condition command has not been received (S1122: No), the process of S1122 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition command has been received, the machining condition is set based on the machining condition command, and the machining condition setting is stored in the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1123). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1113.

  As described above, the setting of the machining conditions is stored in the flash memory 261 that can hold the memory even when the power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the setting of the machining conditions is stored in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110. In such a case, the machining conditions are not set in the start-up process. Therefore, when the machining condition setting is stored in the flash memory 260, the machining condition command is not output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113.

  Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured and shipped, generally a shipping inspection is performed in a factory. In the shipping inspection, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is also checked. When the power is turned on in this factory shipment inspection, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets the machining conditions as factory shipment processing if the flash memory 260 does not store the machining condition settings. When the processing conditions are set in the shipping inspection, a processing condition command based on the determined processing conditions is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  By doing this, the machining condition command is analyzed, the change method in which the command is processed is analyzed, the special out command is grasped, and the special out command grasped by the “hanging board” or the like is a voice lamp control device. Since it is possible to prevent the processing condition command from being output after the processing condition command is output at the time of the shipping inspection and installed in the amusement store even for an injustice to be output to 113, such “ It is possible to prevent fraud due to “hanging board”.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 shipped from the factory has different processing conditions set in each pachinko machine 10, and a command for determining that each pachinko machine 10 installed in the amusement store is a regular special out command. Can be different. Therefore, even if the special out command is analyzed from the pachinko machine 10 installed in the amusement store, it is possible to prevent the other out of the pachinko machines 10 from determining that the special out command is a regular special out command.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the machining condition setting is not stored in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110, the machining condition setting is flashed by setting the machining condition. When stored in the memory 261, the processing condition command is not output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the setting random number value is obtained from the random number generation circuit 260 of the main controller 110 and the setting of the processing condition is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. The RTC 263 capable of measuring the date and time may be provided in place of the random number generation circuit 260. The RTC 263 of the main controller 110 is a timekeeping IC chip called a “real time clock”, has a built-in battery, and can count even when no power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Is possible. The RTC 263 of this embodiment outputs “year”, “month”, “day”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second” to the main controller 110 as data.

  Thus, when it comprises with RTC263, it is good to set processing conditions as follows. A value obtained by multiplying each value of the value acquired from the RTC 263 (for example, 10:42 on November 15, 2011) is multiplied by a predetermined constant (for example, 15321), and the value is divided by 256, and the remainder Is set as the set random number value, and the setting of the processing condition is determined based on the processing condition setting table 202i shown in FIG. Specifically, (2011 × 11 × 15 × 10 × 42 × 15321) / 256 = 8334050724 remainder 156, and the obtained set random number value is 156. Therefore, setting B is determined in this case based on the machining condition table shown in FIG.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the setting of the processing conditions based on the value that changes every moment. Further, by changing the time setting of each pachinko machine 10, different values can be obtained for each pachinko machine 10, and more different processing conditions can be set for each pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the second is not used. However, the second is not particularly limited, and the second may be calculated using data for the second. Alternatively, the set random number value may be calculated using a part of the data timed by the RTC 263. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the set random number value is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on the time data of the RTC 263. However, the processing condition may be set using the time data of the RTC 263 as it is and the set random number value. .

  In this embodiment, the command that triggers the game action suggestion setting lottery in the sound lamp control device 113 is a special off-command, but it is not limited thereto, and may be an opening command for starting a jackpot, or a specific variation It may be a pattern command. Further, it may be a command indicating that a special symbol has been drawn a predetermined number of times. Any command may be applied as long as it is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the present embodiment, the command machining conditions are selected (determined) from a plurality of machining conditions (setting A to setting C), but the present invention is not limited to this. Hereinafter, the modification described as a specific example describes the configuration described in claim 6 of the present application. Specifically, the command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is composed of 3 bytes. The 2 bytes are mainly commands indicating the control contents of the game (for example, special out command), and the remaining 1 byte is a command number indicating the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Is granted. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 counts and stores the number of commands received from the main control device 110 and is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the number of commands given to the received command (a signal indicating the number of commands) matches the number of commands stored in the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 back up the number of stored commands in the RAM backup area even when the gaming machine is turned off, and the gaming machine is powered on again. When the power is turned on, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 start counting from the number of commands before the power is turned off.

  Thus, even when a special out command is analyzed by the “hanging board”, a signal indicating a different number of commands is given to the special out command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device each time. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 from identifying the special out command transmitted from the “hanging board” to the sound lamp control device 113 as a regular special out command. Further, when a command is illegally output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the “hanging board”, the number of received commands stored in the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of commands stored in the main control device 110 And the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 cannot identify the command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. For example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (liquid crystal display device) It is also possible to detect fraud due to the “hanging board” since the display is not updated (the display mode freezes).

  Also, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 after the “hanging board” is powered on is counted, and a signal indicating the number of commands is added to the analyzed special out command. Also in the case of output, since the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 store the number of commands before the power is turned off, the number of commands counted by the “hanging board” and the voice lamp controller 113 are The stored count number will be different, and even if the “hanging board” is transmitted with a special out command, a signal indicating the number of commands transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 from power-on is added. The number of commands actually stored in the voice lamp control device 113 includes the number of commands stored before the power is turned off. Ri, it is possible to prevent the MPU221 voice lamp control unit 113 determines that the special off command regular.

  Further, the main control device 110 stores the command number data in the flash memory 261 described in the present embodiment, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores the command number data in the present embodiment. By storing the data in the flash memory 262, the flash memories 261 and 262 can be cleared even when the RAM is cleared based on the operation of the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) or the used RAM area is cleared (S916, S1109) in the startup process. Since it is not initialized, command number data can be held.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, each time the power is turned on, a processing condition setting process is performed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is instructed. A machining condition command was sent each time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with the RTC 263, and the sound lamp controller 113 is provided with the RTC 264. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263 and determines a machining condition based on the time measurement data. In addition, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 264 and determines a processing condition based on the time measurement data.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the first embodiment, every time the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines a processing condition, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a processing condition command to the audio lamp control device 113. The machining condition determined by the MPU 201 was recognized by the machining condition command. In contrast, in the third embodiment, the RTC 263 provided in the main controller 110 and the RTC 264 provided in the sound lamp controller 113 are set at the same time, and based on the common elements, The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are independently provided without outputting a processing condition command indicating the selected processing condition between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the same processing conditions are determined.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Differences from the block diagram (see FIG. 6) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the random number generation circuit 260 is provided, but in the third embodiment, it is not provided. In the third embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with an RTC 263, and the sound lamp controller 113 is provided with an RTC 264.

  The RTC 263 and the RTC 264 are IC chips dedicated to timekeeping called “Real Time Clock”, have a built-in battery, and power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (the power of the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted). Time), it is possible to keep time. The RTC 263 of the present embodiment provides the main controller 110 with “year”, “month”, “day”, “hour”, “minute”, “second (s)”, and “millisecond (ms)” as digital data (time data). Output. Further, the RTC 264 outputs “year”, “month”, “day”, “hour”, “minute”, “second (s)”, and “millisecond (ms)” to the sound lamp control device 113 as digital data (time data), respectively. To do. The RTC 263 and the RTC 264 are attached to the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 at the same time by a dedicated jig when the main control device is manufactured. In this embodiment, the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 have the same date and time up to “year”, “month”, “day”, “hour”, “minute”, “second (s)”, and “millisecond (ms)” by using a dedicated jig. They are set and time is synchronized with each other.

  In the present embodiment, the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 are set at the same time by a dedicated jig, but the set time is set at a time different from the actual time. By configuring in this way, it becomes impossible to determine the time measured by the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 from the outside, and the processing time determined by estimating the time measured by the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 from the actual time. It is possible to suppress (prevent) fraud in which conditions are grasped.

  Furthermore, the time set by the dedicated jig for the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 is more preferably set at a set time that is randomly different for each pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this way, the time being measured is different between the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 for each pachinko machine 10, and it becomes more difficult to estimate the time being measured by the RTC 263 and the RTC 264 from the outside. . In addition, the processing conditions determined for each pachinko machine 10 are also different, making it difficult to grasp the processing conditions from the outside, and changing the processing conditions based on the determined processing conditions using a “hanging board” or the like. It is possible to suppress (prevent) fraud in which the generated special out command is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Each storage area in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110 used in the third embodiment will be described. The addition ID storage area 261b is a storage area for storing an addition ID value that is used when a set random number value is calculated. In the present embodiment, “54321” is stored as an addition ID value by default. Note that “54321” is stored as an initial setting in the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113 and also in the addition ID storage area 262b.

  A unique value “15321” stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later, is multiplied by the acquired time measurement data, and the addition ID is added to the result, The result is divided by 256, and the remainder is calculated as a set random number value.

  In this way, even when the timing data is grasped from the outside, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the calculated set random value by multiplying the eigenvalue and adding the addition ID.

  A storage area in the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113 used in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, the machining condition setting storage area 262a includes a secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 and a secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2.

  The secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is a storage area for storing machining conditions when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines the machining conditions. The conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 is a storage area for storing the machining conditions already stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines the machining conditions. It is. In other words, the machining conditions set and stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2.

  Even when the update timing of the processing conditions is shifted due to the difference in the control processing timing between the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the processing conditions first. In the command discrimination process (FIG. 46, S1220), which will be described later, not only the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 but also the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are executed. Therefore, by storing the machining conditions before being updated in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 updates the machining conditions and then updates from the main controller 110. Even when a special out command changed (processed) based on the previous processing conditions is received, the determination can be made.

  Next, the condition change time flag 223g1 of the sound lamp control device 113 used in the third embodiment will be described. The condition change time flag 223g1 is a flag stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the condition change flag, the machining conditions are determined in sub machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), which will be described later, and the machining conditions determined in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are stored. When the processing condition before being updated is stored in the setting storage area 262a2, it is set to ON.

  When this condition change flag is set to ON, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated in the follow-up machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in a command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220) described later. In addition to the machining conditions that have been set, the special detachment command determination process is executed not only in the machining conditions before updating stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2.

  By configuring in this way, after the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 updates the processing conditions due to differences in processing timing between the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, Even when a special out command processed (changed) under the processing conditions before updating is received, the command can be determined.

  The MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 110 is the same as the updated machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in the pre-determination determination processes A to C (FIG. 46, SS1320 to S1340), which will be described later. If it is determined that a special out command processed according to the processing conditions has been received from the main controller 110, the condition change flag 223g1 is turned off.

  When the condition change time flag 223g1 is OFF, in the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220), the determination of the special outage command is executed only with the updated processing condition stored in the secondary processing condition setting storage area 262a1. Is done. As a result, after confirming that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has updated the machining conditions and has processed and transmitted the special out-of-order command with the updated machining conditions, it is stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2. It is possible to stop discrimination based on the processing conditions before the update.

  As a result, in a period in which a special deviation is discriminated between two processing conditions, it is easier to discriminate it from a regular special out command than in one case. Therefore, the period discriminated by the two machining conditions is set to the minimum necessary period. be able to.

  Next, various data and various storage areas used in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main sub-synchronization correction data 202j shown in FIG. 36 (a) corrects an error due to a difference in acquisition timing between the timing data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the timing data acquired by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is data to be added to the timing data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  In the present embodiment, the time required from S901 to S903 of a startup process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, and the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 42) (refer to 42) is stored as main sub-synchronization correction data 202j.

  The processing condition setting table 222c shown in FIG. 36C is stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 110, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects the processing conditions based on the set random number value ( It is a data table for determining. The machining condition setting table 222c is configured in the same manner as the machining condition setting table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Thus, if the same set random number value is calculated by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, the same processing conditions can be selected (determined) by the processing condition setting tables 202i and 222c. Yes. Therefore, the same machining conditions can be selected (determined) without transmitting and receiving a signal indicating the machining condition command to be selected (determined) between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  FIG. 36D is a list of special out-commands in the third embodiment. In the first embodiment, all commands that the main control device 110 outputs to the sound lamp control device 113 by the command processing (S114, FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are all processed condition setting storage area 261a. Was changed based on the machining conditions stored in the output. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as will be described later, only the special out command (9B60h) is stored in the processing condition setting storage area 261a by the command processing (S114, FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The output is changed based on the machining conditions.

  The special out command is set by a 9B60h 2-byte command in a state before being processed by the command processing (S114, FIG. 39). When setting A is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a as shown in FIG. 36D, the lower third bit of the lower command (60h) of the special out command (9B60h) is an inverted command. The command is changed to 9B64h command. When setting B is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a, the lower 4th bit of the lower command (60h) of the special out command (9B60h) is changed to a command of 9B68h which is an inverted command. . When setting C is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a, the lower fifth bit of the lower command (60h) of the special out command (9B60h) is changed to a command of 9B70h which is an inverted command. .

  For commands other than the special out command that the main control device 110 outputs to the sound lamp control device 113, the 9B60h, 9B64h, 9B68h, and 9B70h commands used as the special out command are not used. By configuring the command in this way, even when the special out command is changed based on the machining conditions stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a, it interferes with other commands (overlaps). ) Trouble can be prevented.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the timer interrupt process of the third embodiment, the process of S120 and the process of S114 are added to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment. The process of S101 in the third embodiment is the same as the process of S101 of the first embodiment. When the processing of S101 is completed, the processing condition update processing 1 (FIG. 38, S120) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the machining condition update process 1 (S120) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the machining condition update process 1 (S120). The machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114) are initially set in a machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940), which will be described later. This machining condition update process 1 (S120) is a process for updating the initially set machining condition.

  In the machining condition update process 1 (S120), first, time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” is acquired from the RTC 263 by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (S121). Of the acquired time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)”, the set time for the time data of “hour / minute / second (s)” (10:00 in this embodiment) 20 seconds) (S122).

  Here, the set time is a preset time when the machining conditions stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a are updated, and a program area (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. )). This set time is set in advance to be the same as the set time set in the sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230 in FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the set time is set to “10:00:20”. In the present embodiment, the number of set times is one, but a plurality of times may be set.

  If it is determined that it is the set time (S122: Yes), the time data of “Year / Month / Day / Hour / Minute / Second (s)” obtained in the process of S121 will be used. (Month) × “day” × “hour” × “minute” × 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) ÷ 256 is calculated, and the remainder is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory of the RAM 203) (S123). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  Specifically, if the acquired timing data is 10:00:20 on October 4, 2011, (2011 × 10 × 4 × 20 × 15321 + 54321) ÷ 256 = 962833121 remainder 145, and the set random number value is 145 Set to

  Based on the set random number value, the machining condition is selected (determined) from the machining condition setting table 202i shown in FIG. 11A (S124). Specifically, if the value of the set random value is in the range of “0 to 84”, the setting A (inverted the lower third bit of the lower byte of the special out-of-order command (changed to 9B64h)), “85 to 169” If it is within the range, setting B (the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the special out-of-order command are inverted (changed to 9B68h)), and if within the range of “170 to 255”, setting C (the lower 5 bits of the lower-order byte of the special out-of-command Invert eyes (change to 9B70h)) is selected. On the other hand, when the time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” acquired in the process of S122 is not the set time (S122: No), the process ends.

  The RTC 263 of the main control device 110 and the RTC 264 of the sound lamp control device 113 are set at the same setting date and time by a dedicated jig, and time is synchronized. Therefore, even if the time measurement data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 from the RTC 263 and the time measurement data acquired by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 from the RTC 264 are independently determined as to the set time, the processing conditions are the same. Can be changed at the time.

  By including not only the value of the set time but also “year / month / day” data in the calculation formula, it is possible to prevent the same set random number value from being set at the same time every day. In addition to “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)”, a value obtained by multiplying the eigenvalue by 256 is multiplied by the eigenvalue of (15321), and the eigenvalue is multiplied by 256. It is the same as calculating the remainder when dividing, and even if “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” is analyzed, it is difficult to calculate the set random number value. .

  Further, not only “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” but also the value of the addition ID (54321 in this embodiment) is added, and the calculation is performed when the addition ID is not added. Too much, it is the same as calculating the remainder when the value obtained by adding the addition ID is divided by 256, and the calculation formula for the set random value can be complicated to make the set random value difficult to predict. Further, by setting the addition ID to a value unique to each pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the calculation formula for the set random number value even if a used machine or the like is analyzed.

  Therefore, by multiplying the “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” by the unique value of (15321) and further adding the value of the addition ID (54321 in this embodiment), as described above. The set random number value can be calculated by combining the case where the eigenvalue is multiplied and the case where the addition ID is added. Compared with the case where the set random number value is calculated only from the timing data, the set random number value is It is difficult to predict and by combining the process of multiplying the eigenvalue and adding the addition ID, the calculation method becomes complicated, and it is difficult to analyze the calculation method of the set random number value.

  In addition, even when the timing data is grasped from the outside, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set random number value calculated by multiplying the eigenvalue and adding the addition ID.

  The arithmetic expression for calculating the set random number value is not limited to this, and other arithmetic expressions may be set as appropriate. In this embodiment, the time data is multiplied, but may be added. In addition, the time measurement data is multiplied by the time unit, but not limited to this, all seconds (s) (for example, 3600 seconds with 1 hour as 1 hour, 60 seconds with 1 minute as 1 minute, 10:00:20 In this case, 3600 × 10 + 20 = 36020 seconds (s)) may be used to calculate the set random number value.

  In the present embodiment, the setting time determined in S122 has been described as 10:00:20, but by setting a plurality of times, the frequency of updating the machining conditions can be increased. For example, by setting every hour or by setting at random intervals, it is possible to make it more difficult for fraud due to “hanging board” or the like to be frequently changed due to frequent changes in processing conditions.

  After completion of the machining condition update process 1 (S120), the process proceeds to S102 (FIG. 37). Each process from S102 to S113 is executed in the same way as each process from S102 to S113 in the first embodiment. When the process of S113 is completed, a command processing process (FIG. 39, S114) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 39, the command processing process (S114), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command processing (S114). In the command processing (S114), when the special out command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission output to the sound lamp control device 113, the processing conditions stored in the processing condition setting storage area 261a are set. This is a process for changing the special out command and generating a processed special out command.

  In the command processing (S114), first, it is determined whether or not there is a command in the ring buffer for transmission for outputting the command to the sound lamp controller 113 of the main controller 110 (S711). If it is determined that there is a command (S711: Yes), the commands set in the transmission ring buffer are determined one by one in order of the output order, and the command is special. It is determined whether the command is an out command (9B60h) (S712).

  When it is determined that the command is the special out command (9B60h) (S712: Yes), it is determined whether the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is set A (S713). When it is determined that the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is the setting A (S713: Yes), the third bit from the bottom of the lower byte of the special out command (9B60h) is inverted. This is set in the ring buffer for transmission as a special out command processed (changed) (S714). On the other hand, when it is determined that the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is not the setting A (S713: N0), the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is set to the setting B. Is discriminated (S715).

  If it is determined that the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is the setting B (S715: Yes), the fourth bit from the bottom of the lower byte of the special out command (9B60h) is inverted. Then, this is set in the ring buffer for transmission as a special out command processed (changed) (S716). On the other hand, when it is determined that the machining condition stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a is not the setting B (that is, the setting C) (S715: N0), the lower byte of the special out command (9B60h) The fifth bit from the bottom is inverted, and this is processed (changed) and set in the transmission ring buffer as a special out command (S717).

  With this configuration, only the special out command (9B60h) is generated by changing the command based on the machining condition setting stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a. The control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case of executing a process of changing the command output to 113.

  As will be described later, the machining conditions are stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940) of the start-up process (FIG. 40) executed when the power is turned on. The special out command (9B60h) before being changed in the processing (FIG. 39, S114) is not output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the special out command (9B60h) before the change is grasped from the outside. Can be suppressed (prevented). Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) fraud in which the special out command (9B60h) before the change is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by “hanging board” or the like.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the startup process of the third embodiment, the process of S940 is added to the startup process of the first embodiment (FIG. 23). In S901 to S903 in the third embodiment, the same processes as S901 to S903 in the first embodiment are performed. When the processing of S903 is completed, processing condition setting processing 1 (FIG. 41, S940) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 41, the machining condition setting process 1 (S940), which is one process of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described in the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the machining condition setting process 1 (S940). The machining condition setting process 1 (S940) is a process for initializing the machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114) by the startup process (FIG. 40) executed when the power is turned on. The machining conditions set in the machining condition setting process (FIG. 41, S940) are newly selected and updated in the above-described machining condition update process (FIG. 38, S120).

  In the machining condition setting process 1 (S940), first, time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” is acquired from the RTC 263 provided in the main controller 110. (S941). Main sub-synchronization correction data 202j (100 ms in the present embodiment) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is added to the acquired time measurement data (S942). Based on the corrected time data “year / month / day / hour / minute” obtained by adding the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j to the time data acquired in S942, (“year” × “month” X “day” x “hour” x “minute” x 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) ÷ 256 is calculated and the remainder is set as a set random number (stored in the other memory area 203k of the RAM 203) (S945). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  Specifically, if the timing data acquired from the RTC 263 is October 3, 2011, 21:00:59, 900 milliseconds, the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j (100 ms in the present embodiment) is added to this value. The following calculation is performed based on the value of 21:01 on October 3, 2011 in the corrected time data (October 3, 2011 21:01:00, 000 milliseconds) Is done. (2011 × 10 × 3 × 21 × 1 × 15321 + 54321) ÷ 256 = 7583023 From the remainder 83, 83 is set as the set random number value.

  A machining condition is selected (determined) from the machining condition setting table 202i (FIG. 11 (a)) based on the set random value calculated in S945, and stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a (S946). Specifically, if the set random number value 83 is calculated in the above specific example, the setting A is determined from the machining condition setting table 202i (FIG. 11A), and the setting A is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a. The

  The main sub-synchronization correction data 202j is stored in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the time required until the RAM access permission (S903) is completed, and the start-up executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the raising process, the initial setting (FIG. 42, S1101) is set by the difference from the time required to complete (in this embodiment, 100 ms).

  The timing at which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires timing data from the RTC 263 in the machining condition setting process 1 (S940), and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the RTC 264 in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130). It is not the same as the timing to get the time data from. This is because the sound lamp control device 113 takes longer time for initial setting (S1101).

  Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 in the processing condition setting process 1 (S940), and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 acquires from the RTC 264 in the sub processing condition setting process 1 (S1130). The time measurement data has a deviation of “100 ms” which is an error in acquisition timing.

  However, the set random number value calculated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the processing condition setting processing 1 (S940) is also calculated by the MPU of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sub processing condition setting processing 1 (FIG. 43, S1130). The set random number is calculated based on the time data of “Year / Month / Day / Hour / Minute”, and “Second (s)” and “Millisecond (ms)” are not used. It is possible to prevent a problem that the MPU 201 of the control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 calculate the set random number value based on different timing data.

  Furthermore, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time data from the RTC 263, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 obtains the time data from the RTC 264 until “second (s)” of the time data. The value of “min” or more differs between the time data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the time data acquired by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. To do.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263, if it is “October 1, 2011 14:33:59 seconds 900 milliseconds”, the sound lamp control device 113 Since the MPU 221 has a difference in acquisition timing of “100 ms”, acquiring time measurement data from the RTC 264 results in “October 1, 2011 14:34:00 000 milliseconds”. However, in the machining condition setting process 1 (S940) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j (100 ms in the present embodiment) is added to the timing data acquired from the RTC 263 in the process of S942. Therefore, also in the above case, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time measurement data “October 1, 2011 14:33:59” 900 milliseconds ”“ October 1, 2011 14 Hour 34 minutes 00 seconds 000 milliseconds ".

  As a result, even when a carry occurs, the time data used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be set to the same value. Therefore, exactly the same set random number value can be calculated by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and the same processing condition can be selected based thereon.

  In addition, by acquiring timekeeping data up to millisecond and using timekeeping data of “minutes” or more for calculation of the set random number value, the timing of the timekeeping data acquisition timing due to an unexpected problem in the normal time of the pachinko machine 10 is obtained. Even when the difference is larger than normal, if the difference is less than the value at which the carry occurs in the value of “seconds”, the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 have the same value of “minute”. It is possible to acquire the time measurement data above, and to suppress a problem that different machining conditions are selected (determined).

  In the present embodiment, the set random number value is calculated based on time measurement data of “minute” or more, but is not limited to this, and may be “second” or more, or “hour” or more.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the main sub synchronization correction data 202j is added to the time measurement data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The synchronization correction data 202j may be subtracted, or half the value of the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j (50 ms in the present embodiment) is added to the time measurement data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, A half value of main sub-synchronization correction data 202j (50 ms in the case of this embodiment) may be subtracted from the time measurement data acquired by MPU 221 of lamp control device 113.

  After the processing condition setting process 1 (S940) ends, the process proceeds to S904 in FIG. In the third embodiment, the processes from S904 to S909 and S913 to S917 are the same as the processes from S901 to S909 and S913 to S917 shown in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, respectively. When the process of S914 (FIG. 40) ends, the process proceeds to the main process (FIG. 24, S1000).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the process of S1130 is added to the startup process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. The processing of S1101 is the same as the processing of S1101 of the first embodiment. When the processing of S1101 is completed, sub machining condition setting processing 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) is executed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130). The sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) is a process for initially setting the machining conditions used in the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220). The sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), which will be described later, is a process for newly selecting and updating the machining conditions initially set by the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130). . Hereinafter, the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) will be described.

  In the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130), first, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquires time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute” from the RTC 264 (S1131). Based on the time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute” acquired from the RTC 264 (“year” × “month” × “day” × “hour” × “minute” × 15321 + addition ID (this embodiment Then, the remainder obtained by calculating 54321)) / 256 is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223) (S1132). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  A processing condition is selected from the processing condition setting table 222c shown in FIG. 36C based on the set random value calculated in the process of S1132, and provided in the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113 shown in FIG. The secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 and the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are stored (S1135).

  The sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) is a process for initializing machining conditions in the start-up process (FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is. The machining conditions selected in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) are stored not only in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1, but also in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2.

  Here, in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130), the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON. When the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to OFF, in the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220), the determination of the special outage command is executed only by the processing conditions stored in the secondary processing condition setting storage area 262a1. Is done.

  Therefore, even if the start-up process (FIG. 42) is completed and the normal game is executed, the machining conditions stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are maintained until the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to ON. Even if it is determined that the condition setting time flag 223g1 is on due to noise or the like, the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) also performs the conventional machining. In the condition setting storage area 262a2, the same machining conditions as the machining conditions stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are stored, so that it is possible to determine the special deviation command. Therefore, even when malfunctions occur due to noise or the like, it is possible to cope with the control of the pachinko machine 10 without freezing.

  After the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) is completed, the process proceeds to S1102 (FIG. 42). The processes from S1102 to S1110 and S1113 executed in the start-up process are the same as the processes from S1102 to S1110 and S1113 of the first embodiment. After executing the process of S1113, the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) is executed.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart for explaining a main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the main process (S1200) of the third embodiment, the process of S1230 and the process of S1220 are added to the main process (S1200 of FIG. 26). The processes of S1201 to S1212 executed in the main process (S1200) are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1212 of the first embodiment. Sub process condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230) is executed after the process of S1212 is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 45, the sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. . FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the sub machining condition update processing 1 (S1230). In the sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230), the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquires time data from the RTC 264, and if the time data is a set time, a set random value is calculated based on the time data. This is a process for updating the processing conditions based on the set random number value.

  In the sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230), first, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquires time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” from the RTC 264 (S1231). The value of “hour / minute / second (s)” of the acquired time measurement data is determined as to whether it is a set time (10:00:20 in this embodiment) (S1232).

  Here, the set time is a time in which the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are updated in advance, and the program area stored in the ROM 222 of the secondary control device 113 ( (Not shown). This set time is set in advance to be the same as the set time set in the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, the set time is set to “10:00:20”. In the present embodiment, the number of set times is one, but a plurality of times may be set.

  When it is determined that the value of “hour / minute / second (s)” of the acquired time measurement data is the set time (10:00:20 in this embodiment) (S1232: Yes), From the acquired time measurement data, (“year” × “month” × “day” × “year” × “hour” × “minute” × “second” × 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) / 256 is calculated. Then, the remainder value is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 203k of the RAM 203) (S1233). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  Here, the RTC 263 provided in the main controller 110 and the RTC 264 provided in the audio lamp 113 are dedicated jigs at the time of manufacture and are set synchronously so as to have the same time. Therefore, at the same timing when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines that the time measurement data of the RTC 263 has reached the set time, the MPU of the audio lamp controller 113 determines that the RTC 264 has reached the set time. The calculation method is the same as the calculation method of the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. If the timing data acquired from the RTC 264 is October 4, 2011, 10:00:20, (2011 × 10 × 4 × 20 × 15321 + 54321) ÷ 256 = 962833121 remainder 145, and the set random value is set to 145 Is done.

  Based on the set random number value, the machining condition is selected (determined) from the machining condition setting table 222c (FIG. 36C). When a machining condition is selected, the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2, and this time, a new selection is made in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1. The machining conditions thus stored are stored (the machining conditions are updated), and the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to ON (S1234).

  By doing so, before the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the machining conditions, the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 (before the new machining conditions are selected this time) The selected machining condition) is stored in the old and new machining condition setting storage area 262a2, and the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to ON so that the command machining process (FIG. 46, S1220) sets the new machining condition. The machining conditions newly selected this time stored in the storage area 262a1 and the machining conditions stored after moving from the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 to the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2 It can be configured so that a special off command is determined.

  Here, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is a control process executed every 4 ms. On the other hand, the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is a process executed repeatedly at a high speed of less than 1 ms, and is one process of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200). A certain sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230) is a process executed every 1 ms.

  Therefore, due to a difference in processing timing between the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) and the main process (FIG. 44, S1200), the machining condition update executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 within the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37). There is a discrepancy between the timing at which the processing 1 (FIG. 38, S120) is executed and the timing at which the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 executes the sub-processing condition update processing 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 In some cases, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 selects the processing conditions first.

  The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 receives the newly selected special out command changed (changed) under the newly selected processing conditions (while the condition change flag 223g1 is on) until the newly selected processing conditions are selected. In addition, since the special out-of-order command is determined based on the processing condition selected immediately before, it is possible to prevent a problem that the command cannot be determined.

  After the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230) ends, the process proceeds to S1213 (FIG. 44). The process of S1213 (FIG. 44) is the same as the process of S1213 of the first embodiment. After the processing of S1213 is executed, command discrimination processing (FIG. 46, S1220) is executed.

  With reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, a command determination process (S1220) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. . FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1220). The command determination process (S1220) is performed based on the processing conditions output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by changing the special release command (9B64h, 9B68h, 9B70h). Any one).

  In the command determination processing (S1220), first, it is determined whether or not a new command output from the main control device 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113 is in the reception data buffer (S1310). If it is determined that there is a new command received (S1310: Yes), the command received from the earliest received command is changed based on the processing conditions. It is determined whether any of the generated special out commands (9B64h, 9B68h, 9B70h) (S1311). If it is determined that the received command is not one of the special out-of-order commands generated by changing the processing conditions (S1311: No), the process returns to S1310, and there is a command received again. Is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is one of the special out-of-order commands generated by changing based on the machining conditions (S1311: Yes), it is determined whether the condition change time flag 223g1 is on. (S1312). When it is determined that the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S1312: No), a final determination process is executed (FIG. 47, S1350). On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to ON (S1312: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313.

  In the process of S1313, if the received command is a special out command (9B64h) generated by changing the special out command (9B60h) based on the processing condition of setting A, the pre-determination determination process A is executed. (FIG. 48, S1320). In the process of S1313, if the received command is a special out command (9B68h) generated by changing the special out command (9B60h) based on the processing condition of setting B, the pre-determination determination process B is executed. (S1340). In the process of S1313, if the received command is a special out command (9B70h) generated by changing the special out command (9B60h) based on the processing condition of the setting C, the pre-determination determination process C is executed. (S1330).

  After execution of the processes S1320, S1330, S1340, and S1350, the process proceeds to S1310, and the process S1220 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that there is no new command.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the determination determination process (S1350) which is one process of the command determination process (S1220) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this determination processing (S1350). The confirmation determination process (S1350) receives a special out command (any one of 9B64h, 9B68h, and 9B70h) generated by changing the processing conditions output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, this process is executed when the condition change flag 223g1 is off.

  In the process of S1351, if the received command is a 9B64h command, it is a special out command (9B64h) generated by changing based on the processing condition of setting A. Therefore, in such a case (9B64h command in S1351), it is determined whether the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is set A (S1352).

  If it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the setting A (S1352: Yes), the third bit from the bottom of the lower byte 64h of the received command 9B64h is inverted. Then, the special out command (9B60h) is changed (restored), and this is overwritten and stored in the special out command (9B64h) stored in the reception data buffer (S1353). That is, the special out command (9B64h) in the received data buffer is rewritten (restored) to the original special out command (9B60h).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is not the setting A (S1352: No), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that an illegal command has been received. In step S1354, an unauthorized reception error command for instructing to notify by text or the like is set in the ring buffer for transmission.

  As described above, the setting A is not stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 even though the special deviation command generated by changing the machining condition of the setting A is received from the main controller 110. It can be determined that a special out command that should not be transmitted from the main controller 110 is transmitted.

  In such a case, it is conceivable that a special disconnect command that has been illegally processed under appropriate processing conditions by a “hanging board” or the like is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is regarded as illegal and the notification is made. As a result, when various types of commands are appropriately transmitted by the “hanging board” or the like, it can be detected, and fraud can be detected at an early stage.

  In the process of S1351, if the received command is a 9B68h command, it is a special out command (9B68h) generated by changing the received command based on the processing condition of setting B. Therefore, in such a case (9B68h command in S1351), it is determined whether the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is set B (S1356).

  If it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the setting B (S1356: Yes), the fourth bit from the bottom of the lower byte 68h of the received command 9B68h is inverted. Then, the special out command (9B60h) is changed (restored), and this is overwritten and stored in the special out command (9B68h) stored in the reception data buffer (S1353). That is, the special out command (9B68h) in the received data buffer is rewritten (restored) to the original special out command (9B60h).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is not the setting B (S1356: No), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that an illegal command has been received. In step S1358, an illegal reception error command for instructing notification by characters or the like is set in the transmission ring buffer.

  In the processing of S1351, if the received command is a 9B70h command, it is a special out command (9B70h) generated by changing the received command based on the processing condition of setting C. . Therefore, in such a case (9B70h command in S1351), it is determined whether the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the setting C (S1352).

  If it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the setting C (S1359: Yes), the fifth bit from the bottom of the lower byte 70h of the received command 9B70h is inverted. Then, the special out command (9B60h) is changed (restored), and this is overwritten and stored in the special out command (9B70h) stored in the reception data buffer (S1360). That is, the special out command (9B70h) in the received data buffer is rewritten (restored) to the original special out command (9B60h).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is not the setting C (S1359: No), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that an invalid command has been received. In step S 1361, an unauthorized reception error command for instructing to notify by text or the like is set in the transmission ring buffer.

  With reference to FIG. 48, the pre-determination determination process A (S1320), which is one process of the command determination process (S1220) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this pre-determination determination process A (S1320). The pre-determination determination process A (S1320) is a process executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special out command (9B64h) output from the main control device 110.

  In the pre-determination determination process A (S1320), first, it is determined whether the machining condition stored in the follow-up machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is set A (S1321). When it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the setting A (S1321: Yes), the condition change flag 223g1 is set to OFF (S1322). When the special out command received from the main control device 110 matches the special out command processed under the processing conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs voice lamp control. It can be determined that the special out command has been processed and transmitted under the same processing conditions as updated by the MPU 221 of the apparatus 113.

  Therefore, even if the condition change time flag 223g1 is turned off, and the special detachment command is determined only by the follow machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in the final determination process (FIG. 47, S1350), the main controller 110 Since the special out command processed according to the processing conditions stored in the conventional processing condition setting storage area 262a2 (the processing conditions before being updated) is not output, the received special out command cannot be discriminated. There is no fear.

  Further, by turning off the condition change flag 223g1 at this timing, the special control command processed under the processing conditions before being updated is not transmitted from the main controller 110, but it is updated. The special out command processed under the processing conditions before the processing can be regarded as a regular special out command, and the period during which the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 discriminates can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress recognition of an illegal special out command as an authorized special out command by outputting an illegal special out command from the “hanging board” or the like.

  Next, the third bit from the bottom of the lower byte 64h of the received command 9B64h is inverted and changed (restored) to a special out command (9B60h), and this is converted into a special out command ( 9B64h) is overwritten and stored (S1323). That is, the special out command (9B64h) in the received data buffer is rewritten (restored) to the original special out command (9B60h).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is not the setting A (S1321: No), the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are the same. It is determined whether the setting is A (S1324). When it is determined that the machining condition stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 is the setting A (S1324: Yes), the process of S1323 is executed and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the machining condition stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 is not the setting A (S1324: No), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that an illegal command has been received. In step S1325, an illegal reception error command for instructing notification by characters or the like is set in the transmission ring buffer.

  As described above, in spite of receiving the special deviation command generated by changing the machining condition of setting A from the main control device 110, the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 also includes the conventional machining condition setting storage area. If setting A is not stored in 262a2, it can be determined that a special out command that should not be transmitted from main controller 110 has been transmitted.

  In such a case, it is conceivable that a special disconnect command that has been illegally processed under appropriate processing conditions by a “hanging board” or the like is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is regarded as illegal and is notified. As a result, when various types of commands are appropriately transmitted by the “hanging board” or the like, it can be detected, and fraud can be detected at an early stage.

  In the pre-determination determination process B (FIG. 46, S1330), the setting A is set to the setting B in the process of S1312 and the third bit from the bottom in the process of S1323, compared to the above-described determination process A (FIG. 48, S1320). However, since it is the same except that the setting A is changed to the setting B in the processing of S1324 in the fourth bit from the bottom, the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, the pre-determination determination process C (FIG. 46, S1340) is set to 3 from the bottom in the process of S1312, and the setting A is set to C in the process of S1312, compared to the above-described determination process A (FIG. 48, S1320). Since the bit is the fifth bit from the bottom, except that the setting A is changed to the setting C in the processing of S1324, the description is omitted.

  After the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220) ends, the process proceeds to the command determination process (S1214) of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200). In S314 to S1219 executed in the main process (S1200) in the third embodiment, the same processes as S1214 to S1219 in the first embodiment are executed.

  When it is determined as the set time in the processing condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120), main controller 110 updates (newly selects) the processing conditions based on that, and sets the updated processing conditions as the processing conditions. Store in the storage area 261a. Also, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 changes (processes) the special out command (9B60h) based on the processing conditions in the command processing (FIG. 39, S114) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 37), and transmits it. Store in the ring buffer. The stored special failure command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101 in FIG. 37) when the next timer interrupt process is executed (after 4 ms).

  As a result, when a special out command is stored in the ring buffer for transmission in the timer interrupt processing determined to be the set time, the special out generated by changing based on the processing conditions before being updated. A command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. At this time, since the set time is also determined in the sub machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 also updates the machining conditions.

  Here, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 repeatedly executes the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) at a high speed of less than 1 ms. On the other hand, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is executed every 4 ms. Due to the difference in processing timing, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110 may receive a special out command processed under the processing conditions before the update after the processing conditions are updated.

  However, while the condition change time flag 223g1 is on, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated and stored in the follow-up machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220). In addition to the machining conditions, the special removal command determination process is executed not only in the machining conditions before updating stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2.

  By configuring in this way, after the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 updates the processing conditions due to differences in processing timing between the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, Even when a special out command processed (changed) under the processing conditions before updating is received, the command can be determined.

  The MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 110 is the same as the updated machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in the pre-determination determination processes A to C (FIG. 46, SS1320 to S1340), which will be described later. If it is determined that a special out command processed according to the processing conditions has been received from the main controller 110, the condition change flag 223g1 is turned off.

  If the condition change time flag 223g1 is off, as described above, a determination determination process (FIG. 47, S1350) is executed. That is, the determination of the special out command is executed only with the updated machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1. As a result, after confirming that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has updated the machining conditions and has processed and transmitted the special out-of-order command with the updated machining conditions, it is stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2. It is possible to stop discrimination based on the processing conditions before the update.

  Thereby, the period which MPU221 of audio | voice lamp control apparatus 110 discriminate | determines with two process conditions can be made into a minimum required period. Therefore, during the period in which the special out command is determined under the two processing conditions (period in which the condition change flag 223g1 is on), an illegal special out command is transmitted and is easily determined as a regular special out command. The period can be shortened as much as possible. Accordingly, fraud in the “hanging board” or the like can be suppressed.

  Also, in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940) and the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) executed when the power is turned on before the normal game is performed, the machining conditions are selected from a plurality of machining conditions. Since it is selected and initially set, it is possible to change the machining conditions that are set every time the pachinko machine is powered on. Therefore, even if a special out command output from the main control device 110 is analyzed on a used machine or the like, if the special out command is different depending on the pachinko machine 10, the special out command is changed to a regular special command. Since it is not discriminated as a detach command, it is possible to reduce the damage caused by the illegitimate analysis of the special detach command illegally analyzed by the “hanging board” or the like to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 select the same processing condition, a signal (command) indicating the selected processing condition is output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. By analyzing the signal, there is a possibility that the processed special release command may be grasped.

  However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940) and the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130), each of the RTCs 263, 264 provided independently of each other Each of the processing conditions is determined based on the set random number value obtained by acquiring time measurement data and calculated by a predetermined calculation method. The RTC 263 of the main controller 110 and the RTC 264 of the sound lamp controller 113 are set at the same time by a jig at the time of manufacture and are updated at the same time.

  Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquire the time measurement data at the same time, thereby acquiring the same time measurement data and calculating the same set random number value, so that the same processing conditions can be obtained. You can choose. Therefore, the same processing condition can be selected without outputting a signal indicating the selected processing condition from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Similarly, in the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120) and the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), the machining conditions are selected based on the time data acquired from the RTCs 263, 264. The same processing condition can be selected and updated without outputting a signal indicating the selected processing condition from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, when the RTC 263 reaches the set time in the processing condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120), the processing conditions stored in the processing condition setting storage area 261a are updated, In the machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), the case has been described where the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are updated when the RTC 264 reaches the set time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs an opening command to the sound lamp control device 113 when the big hit game is started, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263, and updates the processing conditions stored in the processing condition setting storage area 261a based on the time measurement data. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command output from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 acquires timing data from the RTC 264 and updates the machining conditions.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 select and update the processing conditions for each set time. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in addition to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the processing conditions are updated when a special symbol lottery is won. Is different.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  (A) in FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically showing the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. The carry correction data 202k stored in the ROM 202 used in the fourth embodiment will be described. The carry correction data is a sub-processing condition update process in which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 transmits an opening command, which will be described later, and then the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the opening command has been received. 2 (FIG. 55, S1240), the time required is set to 1 ms.

  In this way, by setting the carry correction data 202k (1 ms in this embodiment), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 and the time measurement acquired by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Deviation from data can be suppressed.

  (B) in FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the other memory area 203k of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. In the other memory area 203k, a big hit flag 203k1 used in the fourth embodiment is stored. The jackpot flag 203k1 is used when the changing time of the special symbol (first symbol) that is changing has passed in the changing processing (FIG. 53, S510) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the fixed symbol is displayed with the fixed symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the flag is set to ON and indicates that the jackpot game is started. The jackpot flag 203k1 is set to OFF after the ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is set in the transmission ring buffer in the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 52, S103).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. In the timer interrupt process of the fourth embodiment, the process of S130 is added to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) of the third embodiment, and the process of S103 and the process of S108 are changed. The process of S101 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the process of S101 of the third embodiment. When the process of S101 is completed, the process condition update process 2 (S130) is executed in the timer interrupt process in the fourth embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 51, the machining condition update process 2 (S130) which is one process of the timer interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the machining condition update process 2 (S130). The machining condition update process 2 (S130) newly selects (determines) the machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114), which are initially set in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940). And processing for updating.

  In the machining condition update process 2 (S130), first, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 sends an opening command to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S101) executed before the machining condition update process 2 (S130). It is determined whether the data has been output (S131).

  Here, the opening command is a command output from the main controller 110 when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 110 determines that the jackpot game has started, and displays an opening image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81. A command for display is output to the display control device 114.

  When it is determined in the external output process (S101) that an opening command has been output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S131: Yes), the RTC 263 displays “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond. Time data of “second (s)” is acquired (S132).

  The carry correction data 202k (1 ms in the present embodiment) shown in FIG. 49A is added to the timing data acquired in the process of S132 (S133). (“Year” × “Month” × “Day” × “Hour” × “Minute” × 15321 + Addition ID (based on the timekeeping data (corrected timekeeping data) added with the carry correction data 202k in the process of S133 In the present embodiment, 54321)) ÷ 256 is calculated, and the remainder of the calculation result is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 203k) (S134). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  Based on the set random value, the machining condition is selected (determined) from the machining condition change table 202i and stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a (S135). On the other hand, when it is determined in the external output process (S101) that the opening command is not output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S131: No), the machining condition update process 1 is executed (FIG. 38, S120). . About the process condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120), the process same as the process demonstrated in 3rd Embodiment is performed.

  In this manner, the carry correction data 202k is added to the timing data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 from the RTC 263. This carry correction data 202k (1 ms in the present embodiment) is determined that the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 (to be described later) has received the opening command after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 transmits the opening command. It is set to 1 ms, which is the time required until the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 55, S1240).

  In this way, by setting the carry correction data 202k (1 ms in this embodiment), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 and the time measurement acquired by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Deviation from data can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263, if the “second (s) · millisecond (ms)” of the time measurement data is “59s999 ms”, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 However, when acquiring time-measurement data from the RTC 264, the time required for the sub-processing condition update process 2 (FIG. 58, S1240) for determining that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later, has received the opening command (this embodiment) In this case, since 1 ms) has elapsed, a carry occurs in the time measurement data of “minute”.

  In the present embodiment, the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 58, S1240) is executed every 1 ms or more as is apparent from the process of S1201 of the main process (FIG. 54, S1200). Since the main process (FIG. 58, S1240) is repeatedly executed at a high speed of less than 1 ms, the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 58, S1240) is also executed about every 1 ms. Therefore, when the opening command is output, it is determined that the command is received in the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1214), and after 1 ms, the opening command is received in the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 55, S1240). And the processing conditions are updated. Therefore, it takes a time of 1 ms from when the opening command is output until it is determined that it has been received in the sub machining condition update processing 2 (FIG. 58, S1240).

  However, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 adds the digit correction data 202k to the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263, the time measurement data acquired by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is also the time measurement data of “minute”. Carrying will be done in advance. Thereby, even if values up to “year / month / day / hour / minute” are used to calculate the set random number value, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can calculate the same set random number value. Can do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in addition to the machining conditions being updated at a predetermined set time, the selection (determination) is performed at random. Each time the jackpot game is started, the processing conditions are selected (determined) and updated (changed). Therefore, the machining conditions are updated not only at a predetermined set time but also at a random opportunity, and it is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the machining conditions used in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, even if a special lose command changed under the set processing conditions is illegally output to the sound lamp control device 113 by “hanging board” or the like, a game operation suggestion setting is set, and an illegal jackpot is generated. When the jackpot occurs, the processing conditions are changed, so that the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a regular special lose command is output after the command that the “hanging board” or the like outputs is a jackpot. This can be suppressed (prevented), and fraud in which a big hit game is continuously generated can be suppressed (prevented).

  Further, by using an opening command output when a special symbol jackpot is triggered as a machining condition update trigger, the machining conditions can be updated at a jackpot trigger generated at a random trigger.

  After completion of the machining condition setting process 2 (FIG. 51, S130), the process proceeds to S102 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50). The process of S102 is the same as the process of S102 of the third embodiment. Thereafter, the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 52, S103) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the large opening opening / closing process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the large opening opening / closing process (S103). The large opening opening / closing process (S103) is a process for executing the opening / closing process of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 when the big hit game is executed.

  In the large opening opening / closing process (S103), it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 203k1 is on (S2001). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k1 is on (S2001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (S2002). Here, the opening time is an opening image for informing the player of the start of the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the main control device 110 outputs an opening command to the sound lamp control device 113. Is the time when is displayed.

  If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S2002: Yes), it is determined whether the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is open (S2003). When it is determined that the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is open (S2003: Yes), 10 game balls are placed in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. It is determined whether or not an individual is won (S2006).

  If it is determined that ten game balls have been won in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 (S2006: Yes), the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 being opened. Is closed (S2008). On the other hand, when it is determined that ten game balls have not won in the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 (S2006: No), the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) is set. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S2007). The round time is the maximum time from opening the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to closing it. In this embodiment, the round time is set to 30 seconds.

  When it is determined that the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed (S2007: Yes), the processing of S2008 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has not elapsed (S2007: No), this process is terminated. After the processing of S2008 is executed, the value of the round counter is “−1” (S2009).

  The round counter is a counter representing the number of times the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is released in the big hit game. Therefore, in the case of 15R big hit, the value of the round counter “15” is set in the process of S515 (FIG. 53) of the changing process (FIG. 53, S510) described later. In the case of 5R jackpot, the value of the round counter is set to “5” in the process of S515 (FIG. 53) of the changing process (FIG. 53, S510) described later.

  It is determined whether the value of the round counter is “0” (S2010). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (S2010: Yes), an ending command is set (S2012). Thereafter, the jackpot flag 203k1 is set to off (S2013). The ending command is to notify the player of the end of the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81 when the final round (the opening of the last first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650) is finished. This is a command for displaying an ending image to be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “0” (S2010: No), an inter-round command for instructing display of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set between rounds. Then, this process ends. If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k1 is off and the opening time has not elapsed (S2001: No, S2002: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is closed (S2003: No), it is time to open the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. It is determined (S2004).

  When it is determined that it is time to open the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 (S2004: Yes), the corresponding variable winning device is opened. If the corresponding variable winning device is a big hit based on a lottery result based on starting winning at the first entrance 63, the first variable winning opening 65 is opened and the second entrance 64 is started. If it is a big win based on the lottery result based on winning, the second variable winning port 650 is opened (S2005). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not time to open the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 (S2004: No), this process is terminated.

  After the large opening opening / closing process (FIG. 52, S103) ends, the process proceeds to S104 (FIG. 50). The processes from S104 to S107 are the same as the processes from S104 to S107 of the third embodiment. After the process of S107 is executed, a fluctuation process (FIG. 18, S108) is executed.

  The variation process (FIG. 50, S108) of the fourth embodiment differs from the variation process (FIG. 18, S108) of the third embodiment in the contents of the during-variation process (FIG. 53, S510).

  With reference to FIG. 53, in the fourth embodiment, the changing process (S510), which is one process of the changing process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the changing process (S510). In the changing process (FIG. 53, S510), the process of S520, the process of S521, and the process of S522 are added to the changing process (FIG. 19, S510) of the third embodiment. Each process from S511 to S513 is the same as each process from S511 to S513 in the third embodiment.

  In the processing of S513 in FIG. 53, when it is determined that the big winning lottery result of the changing first symbol (special symbol) is a win (S513: Yes), the big hit flag 203k1 is turned on and set (stored). (S520). When the process of S520 ends, the process proceeds to S514. In the fourth embodiment, the processes from S514 to S516 are the same as the processes from S514 to S516 executed in the changing process (FIG. 19, S510) of the third embodiment (first embodiment). Executed.

  After the process of S515, the process proceeds to S521. In the process of S521 of the fourth embodiment, the 15R jackpot opening command is set in the transmission ring buffer in which the command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is stored (S521). The 15R jackpot opening command is a command for displaying an opening image for notifying the player of the start of the 15R jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is started.

  On the other hand, after the process of S516, the process proceeds to S522. In the process of S522, the 5R jackpot opening command is set in the transmission ring buffer in which the command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is stored (S522). The 5R jackpot opening command is a command for displaying an opening image for notifying the player of the start of the 5R jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot game is started.

  After the end of the variation process (FIG. 18, S108), the process proceeds to S109 (FIG. 37). Each process from S109 to S114 is executed in the same way as each process from S109 to S114 in the third embodiment. After the process of S114 is executed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) is terminated.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining a main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. In the main process (FIG. 54, S1200) of the fourth embodiment, the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230) is a sub machining condition update process compared to the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) of the third embodiment. 2 (FIG. 55, S1240). The processes from S1201 to S1207 and S1209 to S1212 are executed in the same way as the processes from S1201 to S1207 and S1209 to S1212 of the third embodiment. When the process of S1212 is completed, the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 55, S1240) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 55, the sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240) which is one process of the main process (S1200) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the sub machining condition update processing 2 (S1240). In the sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240), the machining conditions are updated every set time, and the machining conditions are set to RTC 264 when the opening command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is received. It is the process for selecting based on the time data acquired from. The sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 55, S1240) is a process for updating the machining conditions initially set in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130).

  In the sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240), it is first determined whether a 15R jackpot opening command or a 5R jackpot opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1241). When it is determined that the 15R jackpot opening command or the 5R jackpot opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S1241: Yes), time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute” is acquired from the RTC 264. (S1242). Based on the timing data acquired in the process of (S1242), (“year” × “month” × “day” × “hour” × “minute” × 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) / 256 is calculated. Then, the remainder of the calculation result is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 223g) (S1243). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  The machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 261a are stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2, and based on the set random number value calculated in the processing of S1243, the machining conditions shown in FIG. A machining condition is selected (determined) from the change table 222c and stored in the follow machining condition setting storage area 262a1 (S1244). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 15R jackpot opening command or the 5R jackpot opening command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S1241: No), the sub machining condition update process 1 is executed (FIG. 45, S1230). ). For the sub machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), the same processing as that described in the third embodiment is executed.

  With this configuration, for each set time, a random machining condition is selected and updated based on the time measurement data periodically acquired from the RTC 264. Furthermore, the machining conditions can be updated in response to the jackpot generated at a random opportunity, and the machining conditions can be updated at a more random opportunity.

  In addition, by changing the processing conditions triggered by the jackpot, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the consecutive occurrence of the jackpot even if the fraud is caused by the “hanging board” or the like.

  When the machining conditions are updated with the predetermined set time as an update opportunity, the predetermined set time is reached when the processing timing of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is not reached, and the processing cycle is short. In some cases, the machining conditions may be updated before the main controller 110 in the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230) of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 201 of the sound lamp controller 113. .

  However, by using the opening command as an opportunity to update (change) the machining conditions, the machining conditions can be updated in accordance with the processing execution cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine that the opening command has been received and update the machining conditions by the execution time (after 4 ms) of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 50). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the sound lamp control device 113 updates the machining conditions before the main control device 110 and cannot determine the special off command.

  In the process of S1244, the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON, but the machining conditions stored in the new machining condition setting storage area 261a1 are stored according to the old and new machining condition setting storage area 262a2. As a result, the machining conditions in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are also updated, and even when the condition change flag 223g1 is mistakenly determined to be on due to noise or the like, the special out command is discriminated with the new machining conditions as much as possible. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j is added to the timing data acquired from the RTC 263 in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Thus, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 synchronizes with the timing data acquired from the RTC 264 in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) (the timing data used to calculate the set random number value is the same). The case of making it explained was explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56A, S940) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are executed. In the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56 (b), S1130), a process of adjusting the acquisition timing is executed so that the timing data can be acquired from the RTCs 263 and 264 at the same timing.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, in the processing condition setting process 1 (FIG. 41, S940), the acquired time data is added to the main sub-synchronization correction data 202j. Thereby, it is synchronized with the timing data acquired in the sub machining condition setting processing 1 (FIG. 43, S1130) (the timing data used to calculate the set random number value is the same). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56 (a), S940) and the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56 (b), S1130) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are performed. And the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in that the timing data can be acquired at the same timing.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 221 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 56A is a flowchart for explaining the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56A, S940), which is one process of the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. is there. The machining condition setting process 1 (S940) is a process for initially setting the machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114). The machining conditions initially set in the machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56A, S940) are newly selected (determined) and updated in the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120). Hereinafter, the processing condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56A, S940) will be described.

  In the processing condition setting process 1 (S940), first, it is determined whether the standby time has elapsed (S955). In the standby time, the initial setting process is completed in the start-up process (FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the process of S1131 described later is performed in the sub-processing condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130). The time until execution (in this embodiment, 100 ms) is set. By setting the standby time, when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can acquire the time data from the RTC 264, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can acquire the time data from the RTC 263. The timing of obtaining time data can be synchronized. In this embodiment, the standby time is set so that the timing data acquisition timing error is less than 1 ms.

  When it is determined that the standby time (100 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S955: Yes), time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s)” is acquired from the RTC 263. (S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby time (100 ms in the present embodiment) has not elapsed (S955: No), this process is repeated, and this process is repeated until the standby time elapses (that is, the standby time). Wait until the elapses).

  It is determined whether the “second (s)” of the acquired time measurement data is 10 seconds (S957). When it is determined that “second (s)” of the acquired time measurement data is 10 seconds (S957: Yes), based on the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 (“year” × “month” × “day”) ”ד hour ”ד minute ”× 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) ÷ 256 is calculated, and the remainder of the calculation result is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 203k). (S958). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  A machining condition is selected from the machining condition setting table 202i based on the set random value calculated in the process of S958, and stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a (S951). On the other hand, when it is determined that “second (s)” of the acquired time measurement data is not 10 seconds (S957: No), the process returns to (S956) again, and time measurement data is acquired and acquired from the RTC 263. This process is repeated until the timing data reaches 10 seconds.

  FIG. 56B is a flowchart for explaining the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) which is one process of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. This sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) is a process for setting the machining conditions used in the command determination process (S1220, FIG. 46). The machining conditions initially set in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56B, S1130) are newly selected and updated in the process of the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230). Hereinafter, the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56B, S1130) will be described.

  In the sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130), the process of S955 is deleted from the above-described machining condition setting process 1 (FIGS. 56A and S940), and the selected machining condition is changed to the machining condition in the process of S951. What is stored in the setting storage area 261a is that the processing conditions in S1136 are changed to store the processing conditions in the secondary processing condition setting storage area 262a1 and the secondary processing condition setting storage area 262a2. Since it is the same except for it, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Until the process of S957, the time difference between the timing at which the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the timing data from the RTC 263 and the timing at which the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 acquires the timing data from the RTC 264 is less than 1 ms, and the RTC 263 The process of acquiring time-measured data from the computer is also executed at a high speed of less than 1 ms. In addition, as will be described later, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 also acquires time measurement data from the RTC 264 in the sub machining condition setting processing 1 (FIG. 56 (b), S1130), and whether the acquired time measurement data is 10 seconds. If it is 10 seconds, the set random number value is calculated based on the value of “minute” or more in the time measurement data acquired at that time. In this way, when determining the timing of the update, the determination is made in units of “seconds”, and the calculation of the set random number value is changed as “minutes” or more, so that the timing data is calculated from the outside (this embodiment 10 seconds) is analyzed, and even if an attempt is made to calculate the set random number value based on the time measurement data acquired at that timing, the range of the time measurement data from which the set random number value is calculated is used for judgment. (Judgment is only for "second", the set random number is calculated from "year" to "minute"), so the time to determine the acquisition timing (this implementation In the embodiment, even if 10 seconds) is analyzed, it is difficult to estimate the set random number value.

  As a result, the same processing condition can be selected without transmitting / receiving a signal indicating the processing condition to be selected between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, so that the signal indicating the processing condition is analyzed. Thus, it is possible to suppress (prevent) fraud in which the special out command generated by the change is grasped and the special out command generated by changing the “lamp board” or the like is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. can do.

  The sub machining condition setting process 1 (S1130) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not provided with the process of S955 executed by the machining condition setting process 1 (S940) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110. In the sub machining condition setting process 1, a standby time may be provided to synchronize with each other.

  In the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56B, S1130), the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON. When the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to OFF, in the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220), the determination of the special outage command is executed only by the processing conditions stored in the secondary processing condition setting storage area 262a1. Is done.

  Therefore, even if the start-up process (FIG. 42) is completed and the normal game is executed, the machining conditions stored in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are maintained until the condition change time flag 223g1 is set to ON. In the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 56 (b), S1130) even when it is determined that the condition setting time flag 223g1 is ON due to noise or the like, Since the machining conditions that are the same as the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 are also stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2, it is possible to determine the special out-of-order command. Therefore, even when a malfunction occurs due to noise or the like, the game can be continued without freezing the control of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described above, in the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120), when the RTC 263 reaches the set time, the machining conditions stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a are updated, and the sub machining is performed. In the condition update process 1 (FIG. 45, S1230), the case where the machining conditions stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 and the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are updated when the RTC 264 reaches the set time will be described. did.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, when the RTC 263 reaches the set time in the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 58, S120), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 uses the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263. Based on this, the machining conditions are selected and stored for change schedule. Further, when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 also has the same set time, the machining condition is selected (determined) based on the time data acquired from the RTC 264 and stored as a scheduled change. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs the normal symbol variation pattern command to the sound lamp control device 113, the processing condition stored for the change schedule is formally set as the processing condition. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 also officially sets the processing condition stored for the change schedule as the processing condition based on the reception of the normal symbol variation pattern command output from the main control device 110.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 select (determine) and update the processing conditions for each set time. However, in the sixth embodiment, even if the set time is reached, the machining conditions are not immediately changed (updated), and the machining conditions are changed in response to transmission / reception of a normal pattern variation pattern command. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Thereby, in the structure of 6th Embodiment, the shift | offset | difference of the update timing of the process conditions of the main control apparatus 110 and the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be prevented (eliminated).

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from the block diagram (FIG. 35) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c is provided in the flash memory 261 of the main controller 110, but is not provided in the third embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the scheduled processing condition setting storage area 262c is provided according to the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113, but is not provided in the third embodiment.

  The main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c stores a machining condition selected (decided) for a change schedule at a set time in a machining condition update process 1 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later. Storage area.

  In the sub scheduled process condition setting storage area 262c, the sub process condition update process 1 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later, stores the process condition selected for the scheduled change at the set time. Storage area.

  Thus, by providing the flash memory 261 with the main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c and the scheduled machining condition setting storage area 262c according to the flash memory 262, the RAM erase switch 122 can be operated or the RAM work area can be changed. Even if clearing (S1109, FIG. 42) is performed, the stored contents are not cleared. Therefore, the processing condition is initialized, and a special release command generated by a command based on the processing condition that is illegally initialized is “hanging board. ”Or the like can prevent fraud output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the main schedule change flag 203k2 is provided in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but is not provided in the eighth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the schedule change flag 223g2 is provided according to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but is not provided in the eighth embodiment.

  The main schedule change flag 203k2 is turned on and stored in the other memory area 203k of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 when the machining conditions are stored in the main planned machining condition setting storage area 261c. That is, when the main schedule change flag 203k2 is turned on, it indicates that the machining conditions for the change schedule are stored in the main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c.

  The slave schedule change flag 223g2 is turned on and stored in the other memory area 223g of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the machining conditions are stored in the slave schedule machining condition setting storage area 262c. That is, when the follow schedule change flag 223g2 is turned on, it indicates that the machining conditions for the scheduled change are being stored in the follow schedule machining condition setting storage area 261c.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart for explaining the machining condition update process 1 (S120) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. With reference to FIG. 58, the machining condition update process 1 (S120), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the machining condition update process 1 (S120). The machining condition update process 1 (S120) is a process for setting and updating the machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114).

  In the machining condition update process 1 (S120), first, it is determined whether the main schedule change flag 203k2 is on (S141). When it is determined that the main schedule change flag 203k2 is not on (S141: No), time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” is acquired from the RTC 263. (S142).

  It is determined whether the “hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” of the acquired time measurement data is a set time (10:00:00 500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds in this embodiment). (S143). It is determined that “hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” of the acquired time measurement data is a set time (10:00:00 500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds in this embodiment). (S143: Yes), based on the timing data acquired from the RTC 263, ("year" x "month" x "day" x "hour" x "minute" x 15321 + addition ID (in this embodiment, 54321)) ÷ 256 is calculated, and the remainder of the calculation result is set as a set random number value (stored in the other memory area 203k) (S144). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula.

  Based on the set random value calculated in S144, a machining condition is selected from the machining condition setting table 202i, stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a, and the main schedule change flag 203k2 is set to ON (S145).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main schedule change flag 203k2 is on (S141: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (the first normal hit fluctuation pattern, the second normal hit fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 10B), It is determined whether or not a special deviation variation pattern or a deviation variation pattern has been received in the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1214). (S146).

  The normal symbol variation pattern (any one of the first ordinary variation pattern, the second ordinary variation pattern, the special deviation variation pattern, or the variation variation pattern shown in FIG. 10B) is output from the main controller 110. When it is determined that the data is output in (S101) (S146: Yes), the machining conditions stored in the main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c are stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a (S147). The main schedule change flag 203k2 is set to OFF, and this process ends (S148).

  On the other hand, “hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” of the time measurement data acquired in the process of S143 is a set time (in this embodiment, 10:00:00 500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds). If it is determined that it is not (S143: No), or the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command (shown in FIG. 10B, the first normal fluctuation pattern, the second normal fluctuation pattern, the special deviation fluctuation pattern, the deviation If it is determined that any one of the variation patterns) is not output in the process of the external output process (S101) of the main controller 110 (S146: No), this process ends.

  Timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds. Therefore, the setting time is set to “500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds” by setting the value of milliseconds to a width of 4 milliseconds in consideration of the processing interval. This prevents a problem that the set time cannot be determined by the processing interval, and when the set time is reached, the time data can be acquired from the RTC 263 and the processing conditions can be selected.

  In addition, the setting time in the main control device 110 is set to 10:00:00 500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds, and the setting time in the sound lamp control device 113 is set to 10:00:00 500 milliseconds. When the deviation occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 obtains the time data in the range of 500 milliseconds to 503 milliseconds, so that the value of the millisecond is different. By setting “Month / Day / Hour / Minute”, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can calculate the same set random number value, and can select the same processing condition based on it. .

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart for explaining the sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. With reference to FIG. 59, sub-processing condition update processing 1 (S1230) will be described. The sub machining condition update process 1 (S1230) is a process for updating the machining conditions used in the command determination process (S1230, FIG. 46) initialized in the sub machining condition setting process 1 (FIG. 43, S1130). is there.

  The sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 59, S1230) is different from the above-described machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 58, S120) in that the main schedule change flag 203k2 in the process of S141 is the follow schedule change flag in the process of S1261. In 223g2, the set time “10:00:00 500 to 503 milliseconds” in the process of S143 is changed to the set time ““ 10:00:00 500 milliseconds ”in the process of S1263, and the main scheduled processing in the process of S145 The condition setting storage area 262c and the main schedule change flag are the machining conditions stored in the scheduled machining condition setting storage area 262c in the process of S1265, and the process of S147 is the machining condition stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 in the process of S1267. Stored in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2, and set the secondary machining condition setting The processing for storing the machining conditions stored in the memory area 262c in the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1 is the same except that the main schedule change flag 203k2 is changed to the secondary schedule change flag 223g2 in S148. Since there is, explanation is omitted.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not store the machining condition in the machining condition setting storage area 261a even when the machining condition is selected even when the machining condition is selected. The setting is stored in the setting storage area 261c. Similarly, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 does not store in the follow machining condition setting storage area 262a1 even if the machining conditions are selected (determined) at the set time. Is stored for the scheduled change.

  Then, main controller 110 stores the machining conditions stored in main scheduled machining condition setting storage area 261c in machining condition setting storage area 261a based on the output of the normal pattern variation pattern command (machining conditions). Update). On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 changes the machining conditions stored in the scheduled machining condition setting storage area 262c based on the reception of the normal pattern variation pattern command to the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a1. (Processing conditions are updated).

  In this case, if a special out command is also output in the external output process (FIG. 37, S101) when the normal pattern variation pattern command is output, change it based on the processing conditions before being updated. The generated special off command is output. The sub machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 44, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed before the command determination processing (FIG. 28, S1214) for determining reception of the normal pattern variation pattern command. Therefore, at this time, the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220) is executed without updating the machining conditions. Therefore, in the command determination processing (FIG. 46, S1220), the special out-of-command generated by the main controller 110, which is changed based on the processing conditions before being updated, is processed with the same processing conditions before being updated. Can be determined based on

  Then, in the command determination process (FIG. 28, S1214) executed after the command determination process (FIG. 46, S1220), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern variation pattern is received. After this (loop processing executed after this processing), the machining conditions are updated in the sub machining condition update processing 1 (FIG. 59, S1230).

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs a normal symbol variation pattern command that triggers the update of the machining conditions, and the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 58, S120) executed after the external output process (S101). ), The machining condition is updated, so that the special out command output in the next timer interruption process (timer interruption process executed after 4 milliseconds) is newly stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a. It is generated by changing based on the stored processing conditions. Therefore, after that, since the main control device 110 does not output the special out command generated by changing the processing conditions before the update, after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 changes the processing conditions, It is possible to prevent the problem that the command cannot be determined without receiving the machining conditions.

  Further, the set time is not limited to one, and a plurality of set times may be set as long as the time data used for calculating the set random number value is the same as that of the sound lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the machining conditions are updated as appropriate, and the special out command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is also appropriately changed. It is possible to suppress (prevent) recognition of a detach command, and to suppress (prevent) fraud due to a “hanging board” or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the processing condition is officially updated, the timing data is acquired from the RTC 263 when the set time comes, and then transmitted at a random opportunity (the third entrance 63 or the fourth entry). It is configured to be based on transmission / reception of a variation pattern command of a normal symbol (transmitted at an opportunity based on winning of a game ball to the ball opening 64). For this reason, it is difficult to predict the value (set time) of the RTC 263 from the transmission timing of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, and it is possible to suppress (prevent) recognition of which machining condition is selected.

  In addition, the time when the machining conditions are officially updated (changed) is the time for sending and receiving normal pattern variation pattern commands that are different from the set time. It is possible to prevent the user from being recognized.

  In this embodiment, the trigger for officially updating the machining conditions is the normal symbol variation pattern command. However, the command is not limited to this and may be a command generated based on another trigger. Further, not only the command but also the normal symbol or the special symbol may be updated based on the fact that it has changed a predetermined number of times.

  In S1267 of the sub machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 59, S1230), the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON, but is stored in the new machining condition setting storage area 261a1 according to the slave machining condition setting storage area 262a2. Memorize the machining conditions. As a result, the machining conditions in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are also updated, and even when the condition change flag 223g1 is mistakenly determined to be on due to noise or the like, the special out command is discriminated with the new machining conditions as much as possible. be able to.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs an opening command to the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 receives the RTC 263. The timing data is acquired, and the machining conditions stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a are updated based on the corrected timing data obtained by correcting the timing data with the carry correction data 202k. Then, when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command output from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 has acquired the time data from the RTC 264 and updates the processing conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the big hit game is started in the machining condition update process 2 (S130) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When the opening command is output to the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263. Next, time data is acquired from the RTC 264 based on the fact that the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has received the opening command. If the time data used to calculate the set random number value is in a range that differs between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 due to the passage of time during that time, based on the time data Without setting the processing conditions, the time data used for calculation of the set random number value is acquired by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 until the same range has elapsed. Select (determine) the condition.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment in the following points. In the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 add the carry correction data 202k so that the time measurement data used to calculate the set random number value is the same. . On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device generate a carry due to a difference in the timing data acquisition timing, and clock data used to calculate the set random number value If it is different, avoid selecting the machining condition based on the timing data, and after selecting until the timing data does not generate carry, select the machining condition based on the timing data, It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Differences from the block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment (refer to FIG. 35 since the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the third embodiment) will be described.

  In the seventh embodiment, the time data 1 storage area 261d and the time data 2 storage area 261e are provided in the flash memory 261 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but they are not provided in the third embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, a time data 1 storage area 262d and a time data 2 storage area 262e are provided, but not in the third embodiment.

  The time data 1 storage area 261d and the time data 2 storage area 261e provided in the flash memory 261 of the main control device 110 obtain time data from the RTC 263 in the machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 61, S130). This is a storage area for storing the acquired time measurement data in order to calculate the elapsed time from.

  The time data 1 storage area 262d and the time data 2 storage area 262e provided in the flash memory 262 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquire time data from the RTC 264 in the sub-processing condition update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1240). This is a storage area for storing the acquired time measurement data in order to calculate the elapsed time since then.

  With reference to FIG. 61, the processing condition update process 2 (S130) which is one process of the timer interruption process (FIG. 50) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the machining condition update process 2 (S130). The machining condition update process 2 (S130) is a process for setting and updating the machining conditions used in the command machining process (FIG. 39, S114).

  In the machining condition update process 2 (S130), first, it is determined whether or not the main delay flag 203k3 provided in the other memory 203k of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is on (S2300). If it is determined that the main delay flag 203k3 is not on (S2300: No), the time data acquired in S2302 in the past is not in the range of “997 ms to 999 ms”, and the acquisition of the main time data is not delayed. Then, it is determined whether the opening command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S101) (S2301).

  When it is determined that the opening command is not output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S101) (S2301: No), the machining condition update process 2 of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 51, S130). ) Processing condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120), which is the same process as (), is executed (S120). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S101) (S2301: Yes), the RTC 263 displays “year / month / day / hour / minute / second ( s) · milliseconds (ms) ”is acquired (S2302).

  Next, when the process of S2302 ends, it is determined whether the value of “milliseconds” of the time measurement data acquired in the process of S2302 is “997 ms to 999 ms” (S2303). When it is determined that the value of “milliseconds” of the timing data acquired in the process of S2302 is “997 ms to 999 ms” (S2303: Yes), the timing data acquired in the process of S2302 is the main control device. 110 is stored in the time data 1 storage area 261d provided in the flash memory 261, and the main delay flag 203k3 is set to ON (S2304). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of “milliseconds” of the time measurement data acquired in the process of S2302 is not “997 ms to 999 ms” (S2303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2311 described later.

  When it is determined that the main delay flag 203k3 is ON (S2300: Yes), it is determined that the timing data acquired in S2302 in the past is in the range of “997 ms to 999 ms”, and acquisition of the timing data is performed. Is delayed, the time data of “year / month / day / hour / minute / second (s) / millisecond (ms)” is acquired from the RTC 263 and stored in the time data 2 storage area 261e (S2307). . The elapsed time is calculated by subtracting the time data stored in the time data 1 storage area 261d from the time data stored in the time data 2 storage area 261e (S2308). This elapsed time is the time elapsed from the acquisition of the time data from the RTC 263 in the process of S2307 after the time data is acquired from the RTC 263 in the process of S2302.

  It is determined whether the calculated elapsed time is 5 ms or more (S2309). By determining whether it is 5 ms or more, the acquired time data in the range of “997 ms to 999 ms” is acquired, and the RTC 263 time data has a millisecond value of at least 2 ms, and a carry is added to the second value. It has occurred. For this reason, a value of 5 ms or more is always set as a value for generating a carry from the millisecond value to the second value. In addition, since it is only necessary to generate a carry, an upper limit value with no problem may be used as long as the value is 3 ms or more.

  If it is determined that the calculated elapsed time is 5 ms or longer (S2309: Yes), the main delay flag 203k3 is set to off (S2310). On the other hand, if it is determined that the calculated elapsed time is not 5 ms or longer (less than 5 ms) (S2309: No), this process is terminated.

  After executing the processing of S2310, or when S2303: No is determined, based on the timing data acquired at S2307 (S2303: When it is determined No, based on the timing data acquired at S2302) ), (“Year” × “month” × “day” × “hour” × “minute” × 15321 + addition ID (54321 in this embodiment)) ÷ 256 is calculated, and the remainder of the calculation result is set. It is set as a random value (stored in the other memory area 223g) (S2311). In the case of 0 data such as “00 minutes”, the value is skipped and excluded from the calculation formula. A machining condition is selected from the machining condition setting table 202i based on the set random value calculated in the process of S2311, and the machining condition is stored in the machining condition setting storage area 261a (S2312).

  With reference to FIG. 62, the sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 54, S1200) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. . FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the sub machining condition update processing 2 (S1240). The sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240) is a process for setting and updating the machining conditions used in the command determination process (S1220, FIG. 57).

  The sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240) is different from the above-described machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 61, S130) in that the machining condition update process 1 (FIG. 38, S120) is the sub machining condition update process 1. (FIG. 45, S1230), the main delay flag 203k3 in the process of S2300 is the slave delay flag 223g3 in S1480, the output of the opening command in S2301 is the reception of the opening command in S1481, and “997 ms to 999 ms” in the process of S2303 is The time data 1 storage area 261d and the main delay flag 203k3 in the processing of S2304 are replaced with the time data 1 storage area 262d and the sub delay flag 223g3 in the processing of S1484 in “998 ms to 999 ms” in S1483. (Time data acquired in S2307)-(time data stored in S2304) is (time data acquired in 1487)-(time data acquired in S1484), and the main delay flag 203k3 in S2310 is in the process of S1490. In the slave delay flag 223g3, the machining conditions stored in the slave machining condition setting storage area 261a1 for the processing in S2312 are stored in the slave machining condition setting storage area 262a2, and the machining condition setting table is based on the calculated set random number value. Since the process of selecting a machining condition from 222c and storing it in the follow-up machining condition setting storage area 261a is the same except that it is changed, the description thereof will be omitted.

  Specifically, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 outputs an opening command to the sound lamp control device 113, the time data is acquired from the RTC 263, and the value of the time data is “August 4, 2011 21:00 30 minutes 59 seconds 999 milliseconds ”. Then, 1 ms after the opening command is output, the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining that the opening command is received, and acquires time measurement data from the RTC 264. Therefore, normally, one millisecond has elapsed after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires the time data from the RTC 263 until the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the time data from the RTC 264. Time data of “August 4, 2011 21:31:00 00 000 milliseconds” is acquired from the RTC 264. Therefore, the set random number values calculated by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are different.

  However, in the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, when the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 is “21: 30: 59: 999 milliseconds on Aug. 4, 2011”, “ Since it is determined that it falls within the range of “997 ms to 999” ms (S2303: Yes), in this acquired timing data, the set random number value is not calculated and the processing condition is not selected (determined), and after 5 ms or more have elapsed. A set random number value is calculated based on the measured time data, and a processing condition is selected (determined) based on the set random number value (the processing condition based on the measured data after delaying the acquisition of the measured data for 5 ms or more) Decide).

  Accordingly, the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263 after 5 ms or more has elapsed is “August 4, 2011 21:31:00 004 milliseconds” or more. On the other hand, the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 264 by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was “August 4, 2011 21:31:00 000 milliseconds”, and therefore out of the range of “998 ms to 999 ms” described later. And used to calculate the set random number. In this way, the values up to “year / month / day / hour / minute” can be made the same in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113.

  As a result, the same set random number value can be calculated, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can select the same processing conditions based on the set random number value. Furthermore, since the main processing device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can select the same processing conditions without transmitting and receiving signals indicating the processing conditions to be selected, the signals indicating the processing conditions are analyzed. In this case, the special out command generated by changing the processing condition is grasped, and fraudulent transmission of the special out command is suppressed (prevented) by the “hanging board” or the like to the sound lamp control device 113. can do.

  In addition, the set random number value is calculated based on the time data up to “Year / Month / Day / Hour / Minute”. 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, even if they deviate, if the value up to the "minute" unit is the same, the same set random number value can be calculated and the same processing condition can be selected. It is possible to prevent a problem that the MPU 201 of the lamp control device 113 cannot discriminate a special out command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the set random number value is avoided by the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 263, and the selection (determination) of the machining conditions is delayed because the value of “milliseconds” is “997 ms to 999 ms”. It was made the range. As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 until the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command of the main control device 110 and acquires the timing data from the RTC 264. Even if time is required due to the difference between the execution cycle (4 ms interval) and the processing execution cycle (1 ms interval) of the sub machining condition update processing 2 (FIG. 62, S1240) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, this range If they are different, the same set random number value can be calculated.

  After the main controller 110 outputs the opening command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 executes the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1240) at 1 ms intervals (main process (FIG. 54, S1200). ) (See S1201)), it is determined that the opening command has been received after 1 millisecond, and time data is acquired from the RTC 264. Therefore, if the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 acquires time measurement data from the RTC 263 and the millisecond is in the range of “997 ms to 999 ms”, after the carry (the value in the range of 997 ms to 999 ms has elapsed) Time data is acquired from the RTC 263 (after being carried to a value of 1 second or more).

  Therefore, in the sub machining condition update process 2 (S1240), the value of millisecond of the time data acquired from the RTC 264 is in the range of “998 ms to 999 ms” obtained by adding 1 ms that is the time data acquisition timing shift to 997 ms. In this case, timing data after 5 ms or more has elapsed is acquired from the RTC 264.

  As a result, the same set random number value can be calculated, and based on the set random number value, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can select the same processing conditions. The main processing device 110 and the sound lamp control device can select the same processing condition without transmitting / receiving a signal indicating the processing condition to be selected. Therefore, the signal indicating the processing condition is analyzed, changed and generated. It is possible to suppress (prevent) fraud transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the “hanging board” or the like by grasping the special removal command.

  In addition, the setting random number value is calculated based on the time data up to “year / month / day / hour / minute”, so that the value in “second” unit is changed to the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller. If the data up to the minute unit is the same even if they are shifted, the same set random number value can be calculated and the same processing condition can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 cannot discriminate a special out command.

  In this embodiment, if the value is a millisecond value within the range to be carried, in order to avoid the range, it is configured to delay the acquisition of time measurement data for a predetermined elapsed time or more. Rather, when the acquired time measurement data has a carry, and the value of the time measurement data used to calculate the set random number value differs between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, the acquired time measurement data is predetermined. A predetermined value may be added, and the carry data may be corrected by carrying a carry.

  In addition, when the acquired timing data is carried, and the value of the timing data used to calculate the set random number value is different between the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, predetermined alternative data is used. Anyway. Specifically, when the main controller 110 outputs the opening command, if the acquired time measurement data is “August 4, 2011 21: 30: 59: 999 milliseconds”, an audio lamp In the control device 113, “August 4, 2011 21:31:00 000 milliseconds” is acquired, and the value of “minute” used for the set random number value is the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. And will be different.

  In such a case, if the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a value of milliseconds of the acquired time measurement data in the range of “997 ms to 999 ms”, for example, “December 31, 2010, 23:00 31 minutes "is set, a set random value is calculated with this value, and the processing conditions are selected. Similarly, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, and if the time measurement data acquired from the RTC 264 is in the range of “998 ms to 999 ms”, the alternative data is “December 31, 2010”. "23:31" is set, a set random number value is calculated with this value, and the processing conditions are selected.

  By doing in this way, the same processing conditions can be selected accurately, even if the main control apparatus 110 and the sound lamp control apparatus 113 do not transmit and receive signals indicating the processing conditions.

  In addition, the alternative data is set to predetermined timing data, but may be configured to select a predetermined processing condition (for example, setting C).

  Further, in the third to seventh embodiments, the processing method (generation method) of the special out-command based on the processing conditions is a method of inverting a predetermined bit, but as shown in FIG. A method of rotating a predetermined number of bits of a special out command in one direction may be used. The method of returning the special out command before being changed is appropriately set in accordance with the method of changing the command by the main controller 110, and the main controller 110 is rotated by a rotation method as shown in FIG. Is set to change, it is possible to return to the command before the change by using the same number of rotations in the opposite direction rotated by the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, the command content can be determined by returning the special out command before it is changed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the changed command and its A special detachment command determination table associated with the contents may be set, and the received special detachment command may be determined based on the processing condition setting and the special detachment command determination table.

  Further, in S1492 of the sub machining condition update process 2 (FIG. 62, S1240), the condition change time flag 223g1 is not set to ON, but is stored in the new machining condition setting storage area 261a1 according to the secondary machining condition setting storage area 262a2. Memorize the machining conditions. As a result, the machining conditions in the conventional machining condition setting storage area 262a2 are also updated, and even when the condition change flag 223g1 is mistakenly determined to be on due to noise or the like, the special out command is discriminated with the new machining conditions as much as possible. be able to.

  Moreover, it can show | play combining each effect by implementing combining 3rd-7th embodiment suitably. For example, the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment can be combined as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a slot machine can prevent fraud due to a “hanging board” or the like by applying the configuration of the present embodiment. Specifically, in a slot machine called an ART machine or an AT machine, the main control device 110 wins a winning combination (bell, watermelon, replay) and the like. The winning winning combination is assigned with game conditions so that when a game is played by a specific gaming method, the winning combination is given to the player. The game condition is, for example, the stop order of reels, etc., and the stop order determined by the main controller 110 by lottery (for example, left reel → right reel → middle reel, middle reel → right reel → left reel, etc.). In the case of a slot machine composed of three reels, one is determined from six stopping orders. Whether or not to notify the player of the reel stop order determined under these game conditions is not determined by main controller 110 but is determined by the sub controller. When the sub control device receives a special command from the main control device 110 (for example, a watermelon winning combination command indicating that a watermelon has won), the sub control device executes a lottery to determine whether or not to stop (assist) the stop order. This special command corresponds to the special out command described in the present embodiment, and the stop order notification corresponds to the game operation suggesting effect of the present embodiment. Therefore, even in such a slot machine called an AT machine or an ART machine, the special command output from the main controller 110 to the sub controller is changed by the method described above in this embodiment. With this configuration, fraud such as “hanging board” can be prevented.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for performing control based on the slave control signal from the master control means, and effect execution means for performing presentation based on instructions from the slave control means, A winning machine in which a player can acquire a predetermined game value when winning a winning combination is executed, wherein the main control means outputs the sub control signal based on establishment of gaming conditions. A slave control signal generating means for generating, and a slave control signal output means for outputting the slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generating means to the slave control means. A determining means for determining the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the control means, and the determining means generates the received slave control signal based on the establishment of a specific gaming condition among the gaming conditions. Specific If it is determined that it is a control signal, a suggestion effect lottery means for lottery whether to execute a game action suggestion effect that suggests the progress of a game that is advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game, and the suggestion effect If the lottery means performs lottery to execute the game action suggestion effect, the lottery means includes suggestion execution means for causing the game execution suggestion effect to be performed by the effect execution means in the winning combination game, and the main control means The sub control signal generating means generates a specific sub control signal based on a change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among a plurality of change rules, and the change rule determined by the change rule determining means. Change signal generation means for changing the method, wherein the main control means sends a change rule signal based on the change rule determined by the change rule determination means to the slave control means. A change rule signal output means for outputting to the control means, and the determination means of the slave control means outputs the change rule signal output means of the master control means based on the change rule signal output by the change rule signal output means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that when the slave control signal is determined to be the specific slave control signal, it is determined that a specific game condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, a sub control signal is generated by the sub control signal generation means based on the establishment of the gaming condition, and the sub control signal is output to the sub control means by the sub control signal output means. . In the slave control means, the received slave control signal is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the slave control signal is discriminated as a specific slave control signal generated on the basis of establishment of a specific game condition among the game conditions. Then, whether or not to execute a game action suggestion effect that is advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game is drawn by the suggestion effect lottery means. Then, in the lottery, when it is determined that the game operation suggesting effect is executed, the suggestion executing unit causes the effect executing unit to perform the game operation suggesting effect in the winning combination game. Thereby, the main control means does not perform the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the game action suggesting effect, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. On the other hand, in the sub control signal generation means of the main control means, one change rule is determined by the change rule determination means from among the plurality of change rules, and based on the determined change rule, the change signal generation means specifies a specific change rule. The method of generating the sub control signal is changed. Based on the changed generation method, a specific sub control signal is generated by the sub control signal generation unit, and the sub control signal is output to the sub control unit by the sub control signal output unit. In the main control means, the change rule signal based on the determined change rule is output to the slave control means by the change rule signal output means. In the sub control means, the sub control signal output by the sub control signal output means of the main control means is discriminated by the discriminating means based on the change rule signal output by the change rule signal output means. As a result of the determination, when the sub control signal becomes a specific sub control signal, the determination means determines that a specific game condition is satisfied. Thus, when a specific slave control signal whose generation method has been changed based on the determined change rule is output, the determination means of the slave control means changes the change output from the change rule signal output means of the main control means. Based on the rule signal, it can be determined that a specific game condition is established. On the other hand, even if the “suspended board” or the like analyzes a specific slave control signal and outputs the analyzed specific slave control signal to the unauthorized slave control means, the specific slave control signal used in the gaming machine Since the generation method has been changed, even if the slave control means receives an illegal “specific slave control signal” output from the “hanging board”, it differs from the regular “specific slave control signal”. Can be distinguished. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a specific game condition from being illegally established, it is possible to reduce damage caused by an illegal act using a “hanging board” or the like.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1, the main control means has a main specific storage means that can retain the memory even after the power is turned off and can be written to and read from. Initial control means for executing processing, and game control means for executing game processing after the initial processing by the initial control means, wherein the initial control means is changed to the main specific storage means in the initial processing Judgment whether information indicating a rule is stored, and when not stored, the change rule determining means determines the change rule, and the information indicating the determined change rule is stored in the main specific storage means And when the information indicating the change rule is stored in the main specific storage means, the change rule signal output means sends a change rule signal based on the change rule to the sub-control means. The slave control means has a slave specific storage means that can hold the memory even after the power is turned off and can be written and read, and the determination means of the slave control means is a change of the master control means. When the change rule signal output from the rule signal output means is received, information indicating the change rule based on the change rule signal is stored in the slave specific storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, initial processing of the gaming machine is executed by the initial control means when the power source is turned on, and after the initial processing, game processing is executed by the game control means. In the initial processing, the initial control means determines whether or not the change rule is stored in the main specific storage means that can hold the memory even after power interruption and can be written and read. If the change rule is not stored, the change rule determination means The change rule is determined by the above, and information indicating the determined change rule is stored in the main specific storage means. And when the information which shows a change rule is memorize | stored in the main specific memory | storage means, the change rule signal based on the change rule is output to a sub control means by the change rule signal output means. The slave control means is provided with slave specific storage means capable of holding and writing and reading data even after the power is turned off, and when the slave control means receives the change rule signal output from the change rule signal output means The discriminating means stores information indicating the change rule based on the change rule signal in the sub-specific storage means. The gaming machine is normally inspected at the time of factory shipment by turning on the power. In the shipping inspection, when the power is turned on for the first time, the change rule is determined by the initial control means, and information indicating the change rule is stored in the main specific storage means. Further, a change rule signal based on the determined change rule is output to the sub control means, and information indicating the change rule is stored in the sub specific storage means. Since the main specific storage means and the sub specific storage means can retain the memory even after the power is cut off, when a gaming machine is installed in the game hall, information indicating the change rule is displayed in the main specific storage means and the sub specific storage means. It is remembered. Therefore, since it is possible to configure a gaming machine that does not need to output the change rule signal by the change rule signal output means, it becomes difficult to analyze the change rule signal by the “hanging board” or the like, The control signal can be prevented from being grasped.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the main control unit has a random number generation unit that repeatedly generates a random number value within a predetermined range, and the change rule determination unit includes a random number generated by the random number generation unit. The gaming machine A3, wherein the change rule is determined based on a numerical value.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, in the main control means, random number values are generated by random number generation means that repeats updating of the counter value within a predetermined range. The change rule is determined by the change rule determination unit based on the random value generated by the generation unit. Thus, by determining the change rule with a random random value, it is possible to prevent the change rule from being biased. Therefore, even if the “hanging board” or the like analyzes the “specific slave control signal”, the regular “specific slave control signal” can be changed at random by determining the change rule at random. As a result, fraud due to the “hanging substrate” or the like can be prevented.

  In any of the gaming machine A1 to the gaming machine A3, the main control means has timing means capable of timing even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, and the change rule determining means is the timing means The game machine A4, wherein the change rule is determined based on a value acquired from the game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claims 1 to 3, in the main control means, the change rule is determined by the change rule determination means based on the value acquired from the time measuring means. The time measuring means is configured to be able to measure time even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, even if the gaming machine power is cut off, the clocking continues, so that depending on the timing of turning on the gaming machine, random values with different dates and times can be obtained from the clocking means. The change rule can be determined using the value. Thus, by determining the change rule based on the random value acquired from the time measuring means, it is possible to prevent the change rule from being biased. Therefore, even if the “hanging board” or the like analyzes the “specific slave control signal”, the regular “specific slave control signal” can be changed at random by determining the change rule at random. As a result, there is an effect that fraud due to a “hanging board” or the like can be prevented. If the date and time setting in the timing means is made random at each gaming machine, the change rule determined for each gaming machine can be made different. As a result, even if a “specific slave control signal” is analyzed in one gaming machine, it cannot be analyzed in other gaming machines, so that it is possible to prevent fraud due to “hanging boards” or the like for a large number of gaming machines.

  Any of the gaming machine A2 to the gaming machine A4 has an initialization unit that initializes the state of the gaming machine by an initialization operation, and the initialization unit sets the change rule of the main specific storage unit. The state of the gaming machine is initialized in a state in which an area in which information indicating is stored and an area in which information indicating a change rule based on the change rule signal of the sub-specific storage means is stored are stored. Characteristic gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claims 2 to 4, when the initialization operation is performed, the state of the gaming machine is initialized by the initialization means. At this time, the state of the gaming machine is initialized in a state where the area storing the information indicating the change rule of the main specific storage means and the area storing the information indicating the change rule of the sub specific storage means are retained. The Therefore, once the gaming machine operates normally, information indicating the change rule is stored in the main specific storage means, and information indicating the change rule is stored in the sub specific storage means, those areas are Even if an initialization operation is performed, it is not initialized but is retained. Therefore, even if the state of the gaming machine is initialized, the information indicating the change rule can be held, so that the change rule signal is not output by the change rule signal output means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraud in which the “hanging board” or the like tries to grasp the regular “specific sub control signal” by analyzing the change rule signal.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for performing control based on the slave control signal from the master control means, and effect execution means for performing presentation based on instructions from the slave control means, A winning machine in which a player can acquire a predetermined game value when winning a winning combination is executed, wherein the main control means outputs the sub control signal based on establishment of gaming conditions. A slave control signal generating means for generating, and a slave control signal output means for outputting the slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generating means to the slave control means. A determining means for determining the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the control means, and the determining means generates the received slave control signal based on the establishment of a specific gaming condition among the gaming conditions. Specific If it is determined that it is a control signal, a suggestion effect lottery means for lottery whether to execute a game action suggestion effect that suggests the progress of a game that is advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game, and the suggestion effect If the lottery means performs lottery to execute the game action suggestion effect, the lottery means includes suggestion execution means for causing the game execution suggestion effect to be performed by the effect execution means in the winning combination game, and the main control means The slave control signal generation means changes the generation method of the specific slave control signal based on a predetermined change rule, and generates the specific slave control signal. As a result of determining the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the master control means based on the predetermined change rule, the slave control signal becomes the specific slave control signal. If the gaming machine is characterized in that to determine that that particular game condition is satisfied A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in the main control means, a sub control signal is generated by the sub control signal generation means based on the establishment of the gaming condition, and the sub control signal is output to the sub control means by the sub control signal output means. . In the slave control means, the received slave control signal is discriminated by the discriminating means, and the slave control signal is discriminated as a specific slave control signal generated on the basis of establishment of a specific game condition among the game conditions. Then, whether or not to execute a game action suggestion effect that is advantageous to the player in the execution of the winning combination game is drawn by the suggestion effect lottery means. Then, in the lottery, when it is determined that the game operation suggesting effect is executed, the suggestion executing unit causes the effect executing unit to perform the game operation suggesting effect in the winning combination game. Thereby, the main control means does not perform the lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the game action suggesting effect, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. Here, the slave control signal generation means of the main control means generates a specific slave control signal by a generation method changed based on a predetermined change rule. In the slave control means, the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the main control means is discriminated by the discriminating means based on a predetermined change rule. As a result of the determination, when the sub control signal becomes a specific sub control signal, the determination means determines that a specific game condition is satisfied. Accordingly, when a specific slave control signal generated by the slave control unit by the generation method changed based on the predetermined change rule is output from the master control unit to the slave control unit, the slave control unit discriminating unit As a result of determining the changed specific sub control signal based on a predetermined change rule, it can be determined that a specific game condition is established. On the other hand, even if the “hanging board” or the like analyzes a specific slave control signal and outputs the analyzed specific slave control signal to the unauthorized slave control means, the specific slave control signal used in the gaming machine is not Even if the slave control means receives an illegal "specific slave control signal" output from the "hanging board", it is different from the regular "specific slave control signal". Can be determined. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent a specific game condition from being illegally established, it is possible to reduce damage caused by an illegal act using a “hanging board” or the like.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means has a main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and a main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave control means includes slave time means synchronized with the master time means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and slave time data acquisition means for obtaining slave time data from the slave time means When at least one of the main control means and the sub control means is provided in the main control means, the main timing data is corrected, and at least one of the main control means and the sub control means is provided in the sub control means. Has a correcting means for correcting the time keeping data, and the sub control signal generating means of the main control means is a plurality of the time keeping data based on the time keeping data or the time keeping data when corrected by the correcting means. Within the change rules The change rule determining means for determining one change rule, wherein the slave control means, when corrected by the slave time data or the correction means, a plurality of the time base data based on the corrected slave time data Subordinate change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the change rules, wherein the main change rule determining means and the subordinate change rule determining means are the main time data and the subordinate time data by the correcting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the same change rule is determined by correcting at least one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means corrects the main time data when provided in the main control means by the correction means, and corrects the subordinate time data when provided in the subordinate control means. In the main control means, when corrected by the main timing data or the correction means, one change rule is determined from a plurality of different change rules by the main change rule determination means based on the corrected main timing data. The In the slave control means, when corrected by the slave time data or the correction means, the slave change rule determination means determines one change rule from a plurality of different change rules based on the corrected slave time data. Thereby, in the main change rule determination means and the sub change rule determination means, at least one of the main time data and the sub time data is corrected by the correction means, so that the main change rule determination means and the sub change rule determination means The same change rule can be determined without sending a signal indicating the change rule to be determined between. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and a regular specific It can be suppressed that the sub-control signal is grasped and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means has a main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and a main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave control means includes slave time means synchronized with the master time means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and slave time data acquisition means for obtaining slave time data from the slave time means And at least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means, the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means at the same timing, the main time data and the subordinate time data. Synchronization determining means for determining the timing at which each can be acquired, and the slave control signal generating means of the main control means is based on the master timing data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determining means. Main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the change rules, wherein the sub control means is a plurality of the change based on the time keeping data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determination means A gaming machine B2 characterized by having sub change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the rules.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. In other words, the main control means measures time even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main time measuring means, and the main time acquisition means acquires main time data from the main time measuring means. Further, the slave control means measures time even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave time means, and the slave time data acquisition means acquires the slave time data from the slave time means. At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means determines the timing at which the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means respectively acquire the main time data and the subordinate time data at the same timing by the synchronization determination means. . Thereby, the master time data acquisition means acquires the master time data at the timing determined by the synchronization judgment means, and the slave time data acquisition means acquires the slave time data, so that the master time data and slave time data of the same value are obtained. Can be obtained. Then, in the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, one change rule is determined from a plurality of change rules based on the main timing data acquired at the timing by the main change rule determining means. Further, in the sub control means, one change rule is determined from the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data acquired at the timing when the sub change rule determination means is determined by the synchronization determination means. Thus, since the change rule is determined based on the main value data and the subordinate time data based on the same value, the change rule determined between the main change rule determination unit and the sub change rule determination unit is shown. The same change rule can be determined without notifying a signal. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and a regular specific It is possible to prevent the slave control signal from being grasped and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave control means includes slave timer means synchronized with the master timer means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and slave time data acquisition means for acquiring slave time data from the slave time means. The slave control signal generation means of the main control means is acquired by the master timing data acquisition means whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied. A main change trigger determination unit for determining based on main timing data, and one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the main timing data determined by the main change trigger determination unit to determine that a change condition has been established. Decide Main change rule determining means, and the sub control means is acquired by the subordinate time data acquiring means whether the change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied. Subordinate change trigger determination means for determining based on the subordinate time data, and one change rule among the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data determined by the subordinate change trigger determination means that the change condition has been established. A gaming machine B3, comprising: a sub change rule determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The In the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, it is determined based on the main timing data whether a change condition for determining one change rule from among a plurality of change rules is established by the main change trigger determination means. The change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the main timing data determined to be established. Then, in the sub control means, it is determined based on the subordinate time data whether the change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied by the sub change trigger determination means, and the change condition is satisfied. A change rule is determined by the sub change rule determining means based on the determined subordinate time data. Thereby, the main change rule determining means and the sub change rule determining means respectively determine the change rules based on the main time data and the sub time data determined that the same change condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to determine the same change rule without notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined by the main change rule determining unit and the sub change rule determining unit. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the signal is analyzed, and the specific specific sub control signal is grasped, and the “hanging board” or the like is used. It is possible to prevent fraud output to the slave control means.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave control means includes slave timer means synchronized with the master timer means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and slave time data acquisition means for acquiring slave time data from the slave time means. The slave control signal generation means of the main control means is acquired by the master timing data acquisition means whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied. Main change trigger determination means for determining based on main timing data, and one change rule is determined from the plurality of change rules based on the main timing data determined by the main change trigger determination means to satisfy the change condition Main change A rule determining unit and a main change rule storing unit for storing the change rule determined by the main change rule determining unit, wherein the sub control unit determines one change rule from the plurality of the change rules. It is determined that the change condition is satisfied by the sub change opportunity determination means that determines whether the change condition is satisfied based on the subordinate time data acquired by the subordinate time data acquisition means. Sub change rule determining means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data, a sub change rule storage area for storing the change rule determined by the sub change rule determining means, Subordinate change rule storage means having a subordinate change rule storage area for storing a change rule stored before a new change rule is stored in the subordinate change rule storage area, Obedience The determining means of the means is a sub control signal output means of the main control means based on each of the change rules stored in the subordinate change rule storage area and the change rules stored in the subordinate change rule storage area. As a result of discriminating the subordinate control signal output by, when the subordinate control signal becomes the specific subordinate control signal based on one of the change rules, it is discriminated that a specific game condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The In the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, it is determined based on the main timing data whether a change condition for determining one change rule from among a plurality of change rules is established by the main change trigger determination means. Based on the main timing data determined to have been established, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means, and the determined change rule is stored in the main change rule storage means. Then, in the sub control means, it is determined based on the subordinate time data whether the change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied by the sub change trigger determination means, and the change condition is satisfied. Based on the determined subordinate time data, the change rule is determined by the sub change rule determining means, the determined change rule is stored in the sub change rule storage area of the sub change rule storage means, and the determined change The change rule stored before the rule is stored is stored in the old and new change rule storage area of the sub change rule storage means. In the sub control means, the sub control signal output means of the main control means outputs the change rule stored in the sub change rule storage area and the change rule stored in the sub change rule storage area. The sub control signal is discriminated by the discriminating means. As a result of the determination, when the sub control signal becomes a specific sub control signal based on one of the change rules, it is determined by the determination means that a specific game condition is satisfied. As a result, the main change rule determining means determines the change rule and changes the output based on the change rule determined for the specific method for generating the sub control signal, and outputs the change to the sub control means. On the other hand, the sub control means discriminates a specific sub control signal based on the newly determined change rule and the previously determined change rule. Therefore, due to the difference in control processing timing between the main control means and the sub control means, etc., even when the sub change rule determination means of the sub control means determines the change rule before the main change rule determination means of the main control means, The sub-control means discriminating means discriminates a specific sub-control signal not only with the newly determined change rule but also with the previously determined change rule. It is possible to prevent the problem of being unable to do so. Therefore, the same change rule can be determined without notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means. As a result, a signal indicating the change rule to be determined is notified between the main control means and the sub control means, and the signal is analyzed, and a proper specific sub control signal is grasped, such as “hanging board” Thus, the fraud output to the slave control means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the determining means of the slave control means uses the slave control signal output from the slave control signal output means of the master control means based on the change rule stored in the secondary change rule storage area. If the subordinate control signal becomes the specific subordinate control signal as a result of the determination, the subordinate change rule storage area next stores a change rule in the subordinate change rule storage area. A gaming machine B5, wherein the subordinate control signal is determined based on a stored change rule.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the slave control means uses the slave control signal output means of the master control means by the discrimination means based on the change rules stored in the secondary change rule storage area. The output sub control signal is determined. As a result, if the slave control signal is determined to be a specific slave control signal, it is stored in the slave change rule storage area until the change rule is stored in the new slave change rule storage area next time. The sub control signal is discriminated by the discriminating means based on the change rule. As a result, the master change rule determining means determines a new change rule, and the slave control means receives the specific slave control signal generated by changing the generation method of the specific slave control signal based on the change rule. Then, from the determination after determining the specific sub-control signal, the determination based on the newly determined change rule and the previous change rule is determined based on the newly determined change rule. Change to Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the determination unit of the sub control unit determines the sub control signal according to the two change rules. Therefore, aiming at a period during which the determining means of the slave control means discriminates the slave control signal according to the two change rules, to suppress fraudulent transmission of a specific slave control signal to the slave control means by “hanging board” or the like. Can do.

  In either the gaming machine B4 or B5, main time data for determining that the main change opportunity determination means has satisfied the change condition, and subordinate time data for determining that the sub change opportunity determination means has satisfied the change condition, Is the same value as gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exerted on either the gaming machine B4 or B5, the master timing data and the secondary change opportunity determination means that the main change opportunity determination means determines that the change condition is satisfied, and the change conditions are satisfied. Since it is configured with the same value as the subordinate time data that is determined to have been, it is possible to determine the machining conditions at the same time.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave control means includes a slave time means synchronized with the master time means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and slave time data acquisition means for obtaining slave time data from the slave time means. The sub-control signal generating means of the main control means includes the main time data acquisition means to determine whether a change condition for determining one change rule for change schedule among the plurality of change rules is satisfied. A main change trigger determination unit that is determined based on the acquired main timing data, and one change among a plurality of the change rules based on the main timing data that is determined by the main change trigger determination unit to be satisfied Rules A main change rule determining means for determining a change schedule, and a change rule determined by the main change rule determining means for a change schedule based on the fact that a preset change game condition is established among the game conditions. Main change rule setting means that formally decides as a change rule, and whether the sub control means satisfies the change condition for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules for a change schedule. Sub-change opportunity determination means for determining based on the sub-time data acquired by the sub-time data acquisition means, and a plurality of sub-time data determined by the sub-change opportunity determination means that the change condition is satisfied. Subordinate change rule determining means for deciding one change rule from among the change rules for a change schedule, and a sub control signal output means of the main control means, when the change game condition is satisfied, Subordinate change rule setting means for officially determining the change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means for the change schedule based on the changed slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generation means of the means as a change rule A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The In the sub control signal generation means of the main control means, it is determined based on the main timing data whether the change condition for determining one change rule for change schedule is established from among the plurality of change rules by the main change trigger determination means. The change rule is determined for the change schedule by the main change rule determination means based on the main timing data determined that the change condition is satisfied. Then, in the sub control means, it is determined based on the subordinate time data whether a change condition for determining one change rule for change schedule among the plurality of change rules is established by the sub change trigger determination means, and the change condition The change rule is determined for change schedule by the sub change rule determining means based on the subordinate time data determined to be established. Of the game conditions, the change rule determined by the main change rule setting means for the change schedule by the main change rule setting means is formally determined as the change rule based on the fact that the preset change game condition is satisfied. Further, in the slave control means, the slave control rule output means determines the slave change rule determination means based on the changed slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generation means of the master control means when the change game condition is satisfied. The change rule determined for the change schedule is formally determined as a change rule by the sub change rule setting means. Thereby, the sub control means does not determine the change rule determined for the change schedule as a formal change rule until the change sub control signal output from the main control means is output. Therefore, the sub change rule determining means can recognize the timing at which the main change rule determining means determines the change rule for the change schedule as a formal change rule by the change sub control signal. It is possible to prevent a problem that the change rule is determined first and the change rule determined by the main control means and the sub control means is different. Therefore, the same change rule can be determined without notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means. As a result, a signal indicating the change rule to be determined is notified between the main control means and the sub control means, and the signal is analyzed, and a proper specific sub control signal is grasped, such as “hanging board” Thus, fraud output to the slave control means can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B7, the changed game condition is satisfied regardless of whether the main change rule determining unit or the sub change rule determining unit determines the change rule to be changed, and the sub control of the main control unit The signal generation means is configured to change the change sub control signal based on the fact that the change game condition is satisfied regardless of whether the main change rule determination means or the sub change rule determination means determines the change rule to be changed. And when the sub change rule determining unit has not determined the change rule for the change schedule, the sub control unit is previously configured based on the sub control signal output by the sub control signal output unit. While the predetermined game control process is executed, if the change rule determining means determines the change rule for the change schedule, the change rule determined for the change schedule is officially changed. Gaming machine B8, characterized in that to perform a process of determining a power law and control process of the predetermined game.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the change game condition is determined and established for the change schedule regardless of whether the change rule is determined for the change schedule by the main change rule determination means or the sub change rule determination means. In the main control means, the change sub control signal is generated based on the fact that the change game condition is satisfied regardless of whether the main change rule determination means or the sub change rule determination means determines the change rule for the change schedule. Generated by means. Then, in the slave control means, when the slave change rule determining means has not decided the change rule for change schedule, the control of the game determined in advance based on the changed slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means On the other hand, when the sub-change rule determining means determines the change rule for the change schedule, the change rule determined for the change schedule is predetermined as a process to be officially determined as the change rule. The control processing of the played game is executed. As a result, even if the changed slave control signal is transmitted, the change rule is not always determined, and a predetermined game control process is executed. Therefore, it can be difficult to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine that the change rule has been formally determined in response to the change sub control signal. Therefore, the determination timing of the change rule can be matched between the main control means and the sub control means without transmitting / receiving a dedicated signal for determining the change rule.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes main clock means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and main clock data acquisition means for acquiring main clock data, and the slave control The means includes a time keeping means synchronized with the time keeping means capable of time keeping even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off, and a time keeping data obtaining means for obtaining time keeping data from the time keeping means. The slave control signal generation means of the main control means includes a main change opportunity determination means for determining that a change game condition set in advance as a change opportunity among the game conditions is satisfied, and the main change opportunity determination means includes the Main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the main time data acquired by the main time data acquiring means when it is determined that a change game condition has been established; Have The slave control signal output means of the master control means outputs the changed slave control signal generated by the slave control signal generation means to the slave control means based on the establishment of the changed game condition, and the slave control means Having subordinate change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data acquired by the subordinate time data acquiring means when the subordinate control signal is received A gaming machine B9 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main timing means, and main timing data is acquired from the main timing means by the main timing data acquisition means. Further, in the slave control means, even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the slave timing means, time is measured in synchronization with the master timing means, and slave time data is acquired from the slave time means by the slave time data acquisition means. The In the sub control signal generation means of the main control means, it is determined by the main change opportunity determination means that the change game condition set in advance as a change opportunity among the game conditions is satisfied, and it is determined that the change game condition is satisfied. As a result, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the main time data acquired by the main time data acquisition means, and the change control condition is established by the sub control signal output means. The changed slave control signal generated by the generator is output to the slave controller. In the slave control means, the change rule is determined by the slave change rule determination means based on the slave time data acquired by the slave time data acquisition means in response to the reception of the change slave control signal. Thus, the main change rule determining means determines the change rule based on the master timing data acquired based on the fact that the changed game condition is established, and the sub change rule determining means is based on the fact that the changed game condition is satisfied. The change rule is determined by the subordinate time data acquired based on the reception of the changed sub control signal generated in the above. Therefore, the sub change rule determining means can recognize the timing determined by the main change rule determining means by the change sub control signal, and determines the change rule before the main change rule determining means, and the main control means And the change rule determined by the sub control means can be prevented from being different. Therefore, the same change rule can be determined without notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means. As a result, a signal indicating the change rule to be determined is notified between the main control means and the sub control means, and the signal is analyzed, and a proper specific sub control signal is grasped, such as “hanging board” Thus, fraud output to the slave control unit can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B9, at least one of the main control means and the sub control means is determined to have received the timing when the change game condition is determined to be satisfied by the main change trigger determination means and the change sub control signal. A game machine B10 having time difference correcting means for correcting a time difference from the determined timing.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, at least one of the main control means and the sub control means, the timing when the change game condition is determined by the main change trigger determination means and the change sub control. The time difference from the timing at which it is determined that the signal has been received is corrected by the time difference correction means. Accordingly, the timing for acquiring the main time data when the main timing data acquisition means satisfies the changed game condition and the timing for the sub time data acquisition means to acquire the sub time data when the changed sub control signal is received. Since they can be accurately matched, the same change rule can be determined accurately by the main control means and the sub-control means.

  In the gaming machine B9, the main change rule determining means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance time data range among the main time data acquired when the change game condition is satisfied, While avoiding determining the change rule based on main time data and determining the change rule based on predetermined main substitute data, the main time data acquired when the changed game condition is satisfied If the value less than 1 second is out of the main avoidance timekeeping data range, the change rule is determined based on the value of 1 second or more of the main timekeeping data, and the sub change rule determining means If the value less than 1 second is the value of the subordinate avoidance time data range among the subordinate time data acquired when the change subordinate control signal is received, the change rule is determined based on the subordinate time data. To decide On the other hand, the change rule is determined based on the sub substitution data that is the same value as the main substitution data, while the value of less than 1 second among the subordinate time data acquired when the change sub control signal is received. Is a value outside the subordinate avoidance time data range, the change rule is determined based on a value of one second or more of the subordinate time data, and the main avoidance time data range and the sub avoidance time data range Is obtained by the time difference between the timing at which the change game condition is determined to be satisfied by the main change opportunity determination means and the timing at which the change control signal is determined to be received by the sub control means. The value of less than 1 second of the measured time data is set so as to be carried to a value of 1 second or more after the time data is acquired. Game B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance timing data range among the main timing data acquired when the changed game condition is satisfied, the main control means changes based on the main timing data. While avoiding determining the rule, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the main substitute data determined in advance, while the main time data acquired when the change game condition is satisfied, 1 When the value less than the second is outside the main avoidance timing data range, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the value of one second or more in the main timing data. In the slave control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the slave avoidance time data range among the slave time data acquired when the changed slave control signal is received, the slave time control data is based on the slave time data. Obtained when the change rule is determined by the slave change rule determination means based on the slave substitute data having the same value as the master substitute data while the change slave control signal is received. If the value of less than 1 second is out of the range of the follow-avoidance time data, the change rule is determined by the follow-up change rule determination means based on the value of 1 second or more of the follow-up time data. It is determined. The main avoidance timing data range and the subordinate avoidance timing data range are a timing at which it is determined that the changed game condition is established by the main change trigger determination means, and a timing at which it is determined that the changed sub control signal is received by the sub control means. Due to the time difference between the main time data is acquired and the subordinate time data is acquired, it includes a range in which the value of less than one second of the subordinate time data is carried to a value of one second or more. Is done. This avoids the case where the value of less than 1 second becomes 1 second or more due to the time difference between the timing at which the main time data is acquired and the timing at which the subordinate time data is acquired, avoiding the case where a carry occurs and the main time data and the subordinate time Get the data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the change rules determined by the main change rule determining unit and the sub change rule determining unit are different due to carry.

  In the gaming machine B9, the main change rule determining means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance time data range among the main time data acquired when the change game condition is satisfied, The determination of the change rule based on main timing data is avoided, and the main timing data is triggered by the lapse of avoidance time until the main timing means counts a value outside the main avoidance timing data range. When the acquisition means acquires main time data outside the main avoidance time data range and determines the change rule based on a value of 1 second or more of the main time data, while the change game condition is satisfied When the value of less than 1 second is out of the main avoidance timing data range in the acquired main timing data, the change rule is determined based on the value of 1 second or more in the main timing data, Said change The rule determining means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the subordinate avoidance time data range among the subordinate time data acquired when the changed subordinate control signal is received, based on the subordinate time data The determination of the change rule and the acquisition of the time measurement data from the time measurement means triggered by the lapse of the avoidance time until the time measurement means counts a value outside the range of the time avoidance time data. When the slave time data outside of the slave avoidance time data range is acquired by the means, the change rule is determined based on a value of 1 second or more of the slave time data, while the change slave control signal is received. If the value of less than 1 second of the acquired time keeping data is outside the range of the time avoidance time keeping data, the change rule is determined based on the value of 1 second or more of the time keeping data, Main avoidance meter The data range and the sub avoidance timing data range include a timing at which the change game condition is determined to be established by the main change trigger determination unit and a timing at which the sub control unit determines that the change sub control signal has been received. The time difference includes a range in which a value of less than 1 second of the slave time data is carried to a value of one second or more after the master time data is acquired until the slave time data is acquired. A gaming machine B12 characterized in that it is set in the above.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance timing data range among the main timing data acquired when the changed game condition is satisfied, the main control means changes based on the main timing data. The main time out of the main avoidance timekeeping data range by the main timekeeping data acquisition means when the avoidance time has passed until the main timekeeping means timed the value outside the main avoidance timekeeping data range, avoiding the determination of the rules. Time data is acquired, and the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on a value of 1 second or more of the main time data. On the other hand, of the main time data acquired when the change game condition is satisfied If the value of less than 1 second is outside the main avoidance timing data range, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the value of 1 second or more of the main timing data. In the slave control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the slave avoidance time data range among the slave time data acquired when the changed slave control signal is received, the slave time control data is based on the slave time data. By avoiding the determination of the change rule, the follow-up time is taken from the follow-up time means by the follow-up time data acquisition means when the avoidance time elapses until the follow-up time means measures a value outside the follow-up avoidance time data range. When slave time data outside the time data range is acquired, and the change rule is determined by the slave change rule determination means based on a value of 1 second or more of the slave time data, while the change slave control signal is received If the value of less than 1 second of the measured time data acquired in the above is outside the range of the time-based avoidance time data, it is changed by the slave change rule determining means based on the value of more than 1 second of the measured time data. Rules are decided It is. The main avoidance timing data range and the subordinate avoidance timing data range are a timing at which it is determined that the changed game condition is established by the main change trigger determination means, and a timing at which it is determined that the changed sub control signal is received by the sub control means. Due to the time difference between the main time data is acquired and the subordinate time data is acquired, it includes a range in which the value of less than one second of the subordinate time data is carried to a value of one second or more. Is done. This avoids the case where the value of less than 1 second becomes 1 second or more due to the time difference between the timing at which the main time data is acquired and the timing at which the subordinate time data is acquired, avoiding the case where a carry occurs and the main time data and the subordinate time Get the data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the change rules determined by the main change rule determining unit and the sub change rule determining unit are different due to carry.

  In the gaming machine B9, the main change rule determining means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance time data range among the main time data acquired when the change game condition is satisfied, Avoiding determining the change rule based on main time data, adding avoidance correction data to the obtained main time data, generating corrected main time data outside the main avoid time data range, and While the change rule is determined based on a value of 1 second or more of the corrected main time data, the value of less than 1 second is the main avoidance time data range when the change game condition is satisfied. If it is an outside value, the change rule is determined based on a value of 1 second or more in the main timing data, and the sub change rule determining means is obtained when the change sub control signal is received. Measured time If the value less than 1 second is a value in the subordinate timekeeping data range, it is avoided to determine the change rule based on the subordinate time data, and the avoidance is added to the obtained timekeeping data. Correction data is added to generate corrected slave time data outside the slave avoidance time data range, and the change rule is determined based on a value of one second or more of the slave time data. If the value of less than 1 second of the measured time data acquired when the signal is received is outside the range of the time avoidance time data, the change is made based on the value of 1 second or more of the measured time data. A rule is determined, and the main avoidance timing data range and the secondary avoidance timing data range are determined by the timing at which the change game condition is determined to be satisfied by the main change timing determination means and the change sub control signal by the sub control means. The Due to the time difference from the timing determined to have been received, the value of less than 1 second of the measured time data is greater than or equal to 1 second between the acquisition of the measured time data and the acquisition of the measured time data. A gaming machine B13, which is set to include a range to be carried.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the main avoidance timing data range among the main timing data acquired when the changed game condition is satisfied, the main control means changes based on the main timing data. Avoids determining the rule, adds avoidance correction data to the acquired main timing data, generates corrected main timing data outside the main avoidance timing data range, and the corrected main timing data is longer than 1 second. While the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on the value, the value less than 1 second is out of the main avoidance time data range among the main time data acquired when the changed game condition is satisfied. In such a case, the change rule is determined by the main change rule determination means based on a value of 1 second or more in the main timing data. In the slave control means, when the value of less than 1 second is the value of the slave avoidance time data range among the slave time data acquired when the changed slave control signal is received, the slave time control data is based on the slave time data. Avoiding the determination of the change rule, adding the avoidance correction data to the acquired measured time data, generating corrected measured time data outside the range of the measured time avoidance data, and generating at least one second of the measured time data. While the change rule is determined by the slave change rule determination means based on the value, a value of less than 1 second is out of the range of the slave avoidance time data when the change time control signal is received when the change slave control signal is received. In this case, a change rule is determined by the sub change rule determining means based on a value of 1 second or more in the subordinate time data. The main avoidance timing data range and the subordinate avoidance timing data range are a timing at which it is determined that the changed game condition is established by the main change trigger determination means, and a timing at which it is determined that the changed sub control signal is received by the sub control means. Due to the time difference between the main time data is acquired and the subordinate time data is acquired, it includes a range in which the value of less than one second of the subordinate time data is carried to a value of one second or more. Is done. This avoids the case where the value of less than 1 second becomes 1 second or more due to the time difference between the timing at which the main time data is acquired and the timing at which the subordinate time data is acquired, avoiding the case where a carry occurs and the main time data and the subordinate time Get the data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the change rules determined by the main change rule determining unit and the sub change rule determining unit are different due to carry.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes a main initial control means for executing an initial process of the gaming machine when the power is turned on, a main game control means for executing a game process after the initial process by the main initial control means, and a game A main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the machine is cut off, and a main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave initial control means for executing the initial process of the machine, the slave game control means for executing the game process based on the slave control signal after the initial process by the slave initial control means, and the power supply of the gaming machine are cut off. A time keeping means synchronized with the time keeping means capable of time keeping, and a time keeping data obtaining means for obtaining time keeping data from the time keeping means, the main control means and the slave control means, At least On the other hand, when provided in the main control unit, the main control unit corrects the main time data, and when provided in the sub control unit, the correction unit corrects the sub time data. The sub control signal generating means includes main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the main time data or the main time data when corrected by the correction means. And the sub control means determines a change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the corrected time data when corrected by the correction time data or the correction means. The main change rule determination means and the sub change rule determination means are the same as those obtained by correcting at least one of the main time data and the sub time data by the correction means. In the initial process, the main initial control means executes a main change rule setting process for setting a change rule by the main change rule determination means, and the sub initial control means in the initial process A game machine B14, wherein a slave change rule setting process for setting a change rule by the slave change rule determination means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the initial process of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control means when the power is turned on, and the game process is executed by the main game control means after the initial process by the main initial control means. And even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main clock means, the time is measured, and the main clock data is acquired from the main clock means by the main clock data acquisition means. In the slave control means, the initial process of the gaming machine is executed by the slave initial control means when the power is turned on, and the game process based on the slave control signal is executed by the slave game control means after the initial process by the slave initial control means. Is done. Even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the time keeping means, time keeping is performed in synchronization with the main time keeping means, and time keeping data is obtained from the time keeping means by the time keeping data obtaining means. At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means corrects the main time data when provided in the main control means by the correction means, and corrects the subordinate time data when provided in the subordinate control means. In the main control means, when corrected by the main timing data or the correction means, one change rule is determined from a plurality of different change rules by the main change rule determination means based on the corrected main timing data. The In the slave control means, when corrected by the slave time data or the correction means, the slave change rule determination means determines one change rule from a plurality of different change rules based on the corrected slave time data. In the main initial control means, a main change rule setting process for setting a change rule is executed in the initial process by the main change rule determining means. In the sub initial control means, in the initial process, the change rule is determined by the sub change rule determining means. Subordinate change rule setting processing for setting is executed. Thereby, in the main change rule determination means and the sub change rule determination means, at least one of the main time data and the sub time data is corrected by the correction means, so that the main change rule determination means and the sub change rule determination means It is possible to determine the same change rule and set the change rule in the initial process without notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means in the initial process, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and It is possible to start the game in a state where the change rule is set by suppressing the specific subordinate control signal from being used and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like.

  In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes a main initial control means for executing an initial process of the gaming machine when the power is turned on, a main game control means for executing a game process after the initial process by the main initial control means, and a game A main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the machine is cut off, and a main timing data acquisition means for acquiring main timing data from the main timing means. The slave initial control means for executing the initial process of the machine, the slave game control means for executing the game process based on the slave control signal after the initial process by the slave initial control means, and the power supply of the gaming machine are cut off. A time keeping means synchronized with the time keeping means capable of time keeping, and a time keeping data obtaining means for obtaining time keeping data from the time keeping means, the main control means and the slave control means, At least On the other hand, the main control means has synchronization determination means for determining the timing at which the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means can respectively acquire the main time data and the subordinate time data at the same timing, The slave control signal generating means includes main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the main time data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determining means, The slave control means has slave change rule determining means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the slave time data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determination means, and the master initial control In the initial process, the means executes a main change rule setting process for setting a change rule by the main change rule determining means, and the slave initial control means is configured to execute the initial process. In the gaming machine B15, characterized in that performing the Supporting change rule setting process for setting the change rule by the sub adjustment rules determining means.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the initial process of the gaming machine is executed by the main initial control means when the power is turned on, and the game process is executed by the main game control means after the initial process by the main initial control means. And even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the main clock means, the time is measured, and the main clock data is acquired from the main clock means by the main clock acquisition means. In the slave control means, the initial process of the gaming machine is executed by the slave initial control means when the power is turned on, and the game process based on the slave control signal is executed by the slave game control means after the initial process by the slave initial control means. Is done. The time is measured even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off by the time keeping means, and the time keeping data is obtained from the time keeping means by the time keeping data obtaining means. At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means determines the timing at which the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means respectively acquire the main time data and the subordinate time data at the same timing by the synchronization determination means. . Thereby, the master time data acquisition means acquires the master time data at the timing determined by the synchronization judgment means, and the slave time data acquisition means acquires the slave time data, so that the master time data and slave time data of the same value are obtained. Can be obtained. Then, in the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, one change rule is determined from a plurality of change rules based on the main timing data acquired at the timing by the main change rule determining means. Further, in the sub control means, one change rule is determined from the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data acquired at the timing when the sub change rule determination means is determined by the synchronization determination means. In the main initial control means, a main change rule setting process for setting a change rule is executed in the initial process by the main change rule determining means. In the sub initial control means, in the initial process, the change rule is determined by the sub change rule determining means. Subordinate change rule setting processing for setting is executed. As a result, the change rule is determined and set based on the main time data and the subordinate time data based on the same value in the initial processing, so the determination is made between the main change rule determining means and the sub change rule determining means. The same change rule can be determined and set without notifying a signal indicating the change rule to be performed. Therefore, by notifying the signal indicating the change rule determined between the main control means and the sub control means, the determined change rule is analyzed from the signal indicating the determined change rule, and a regular specific It is possible to prevent the slave control signal from being grasped and illegally used by the “hanging board” or the like, and to start the game with the change rule set.

  In either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the main game control means updates the change rule set in the main change rule setting process with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means in the game process. The main change rule update process is executed, and the sub control signal generation means of the main control means determines whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied by the main time data acquisition means. Main change trigger determination means for determining based on the acquired main timing data, wherein the main change rule determination means determines that the change condition is satisfied by the main change trigger determination means in the main change rule update processing A change rule set in the main change rule setting process is determined by determining one change rule from a plurality of the change rules based on the master timing data, and the slave game In the game process, the control means executes a slave change rule update process for updating the change rule set in the slave change rule setting process with a change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means, and the slave control means Has a secondary change timing determination means for determining whether the change condition for determining one change rule from a plurality of the change rules is satisfied based on the slave time data acquired by the slave time data acquisition means. And the sub change rule determining unit is configured to select one of the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data determined in the sub change rule update process by the sub change trigger determination unit that the change condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B16 that determines a change rule and updates the change rule set in the slave change rule setting process.

  According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, in the game process, the main game control means executes the main change rule update process in which the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means. Is done. Then, in the sub control signal generating means of the main control means, it is determined based on the main timing data by the main change trigger determination means whether the change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied. In the main change rule update process, the change rule is determined based on the main timing data determined by the main change trigger determination means that the change condition is satisfied, and the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated. On the other hand, in the secondary control means, in the game process, the secondary change rule update process in which the change rule set in the secondary change rule setting process is updated by the change rule determined by the secondary change rule determination means is executed by the secondary game control means. Is done. Further, in the slave control means, it is determined by the slave change opportunity determination means whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied, and in the slave change rule update process, the slave change opportunity determination means The change rule is determined based on the subordinate time data determined that the change condition is satisfied, and the change rule set in the sub change rule setting process is updated by the sub change rule determining means. As a result, the change rule set in the initial process is updated when the change condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the change condition is established, the main control means and the sub control means acquire the time measurement data and determine the change rule. Can be updated. Therefore, by transmitting and receiving a signal indicating the change rule, it is possible to prevent the signal from being analyzed and grasping the determined change rule.

  In either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the main game control means updates the change rule set in the main change rule setting process with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means in the game process. The main change rule update process is executed, and the sub control signal generation means of the main control means determines whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied by the main time data acquisition means. In the main change rule setting process, the main change trigger determination means for determining based on the acquired main timing data, and main change rule storage means for storing the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means, The change rule determined by the main change rule determination means is stored in the main change rule storage means, the main change rule determination means in the main change rule update process One change rule is determined from a plurality of the change rules based on main timing data determined by the main change opportunity determination means that a change condition is established, and the main change rule is set in the main change rule setting process. The change rule stored in the storage means is updated to the determined change rule and stored in the main change rule storage means, and the secondary game control means is set in the secondary change rule setting process in the game process The change rule update process is executed to update the change rule with the change rule determined by the sub change rule determining means, and the sub control means determines the one change rule from the plurality of change rules. The change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means and the slave change trigger determination means for determining whether the condition is satisfied based on the slave time data acquired by the slave time data acquisition means is stored. Subordinate change rule storage area and a subordinate change rule storage area for storing a change rule stored before the new change rule is stored in the subordinate change rule storage area. And a change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means is stored in the secondary change rule storage area in the slave change rule setting process, and the slave change rule determination means is the slave change rule In the rule update process, one change rule is determined from the plurality of change rules based on the subordinate time data determined by the sub change trigger determination unit to determine that the change condition is satisfied, and the sub change rule setting process The same change rule as the change rule stored in the follower change rule storage area is stored in the follower change rule storage area, and the change stored in the follower change rule storage means in the follower change rule setting process The rule is updated to the determined change rule and stored in the follow-up change rule storage area, and the discriminating means of the follow-up control means includes the change rule stored in the follow-up change rule storage area and the follow-up change rule As a result of determining the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the master control means based on each of the change rules stored in the storage area, the slave control based on one of the change rules. A gaming machine B17, wherein when a signal becomes the specific slave control signal, it is determined that a specific game condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, in the game process, the main game control means executes the main change rule update process in which the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means. Is done. The main control means determines whether a change condition for determining one change rule from a plurality of change rules is established based on the main timing data by the main change trigger determination means, and stores the main change rule storage means in the main change rule storage means. The change rule determined by the change rule determining means is stored. In the main change rule update process, the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated by determining the change rule based on the main timing data determined that the change condition is satisfied by the main change trigger determination means, and the main change rule is updated. It is stored in the rule storage means. On the other hand, in the secondary control means, in the game process, the secondary change rule update process in which the change rule set in the secondary change rule setting process is updated by the change rule determined by the secondary change rule determination means is executed by the secondary game control means. Is done. Further, in the sub control means, it is determined by the sub change trigger determination means whether a change condition for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules is satisfied, and the sub change control storage section stores the sub change rule storage means. The change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means is stored, and the change stored in the slave change rule storage area before the new change rule is stored in the slave change rule storage area of the slave change rule storage means Rules are remembered. Further, in the sub change rule setting process, the change rule determined by the sub change rule determining unit is stored in the sub change rule storage area. Then, in the sub change rule update process, the change rule determined based on the subordinate time data determined by the sub change trigger determination means to be satisfied and the change rule set in the sub change rule setting process is changed to the sub change rule. The change rule determined by the determining means and stored in the secondary change rule storage area is stored in the secondary change rule storage area while the same change rule as that stored in the secondary change rule storage area is stored in the secondary change rule storage area The rule is updated to the determined change rule and stored in the follow-up change rule storage area. And in the slave control means, as a result of determining the slave control signal based on each of the change rule stored in the secondary change rule storage area and the change rule stored in the secondary change rule storage area, either When the slave control signal becomes a specific slave control signal based on one change rule, it is determined by the determining means that a specific game condition is satisfied. As a result, the main change rule determining means determines the change rule and changes the output based on the change rule determined for the specific method for generating the sub control signal, and outputs the change to the sub control means. On the other hand, the sub control means discriminates a specific sub control signal based on the newly determined change rule and the previously determined change rule. Therefore, due to the difference in control processing timing between the main control means and the sub control means, etc., even when the sub change rule determination means of the sub control means determines the change rule before the main change rule determination means of the main control means, The sub-control means discriminating means discriminates a specific sub-control signal not only with the newly determined change rule but also with the previously determined change rule. It is possible to prevent problems caused by updating the change rule that cannot be performed. Therefore, the same change rule can be determined without notifying the signal indicating the change rule to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means. As a result, a signal indicating the change rule to be determined is notified between the main control means and the sub control means, and the signal is analyzed, and a proper specific sub control signal is grasped, such as “hanging board” Thus, the fraud output to the slave control means can be suppressed.

  In either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the main game control means updates the change rule set in the main change rule setting process with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means in the game process. The main change rule update process is executed, and the sub control signal generation means of the main control means has a change condition for determining one change rule for a change schedule among the plurality of change rules by the main change rule determining means. The main change trigger determination means for determining whether the change is satisfied based on the main clock data acquired by the main clock data acquisition means, and the determination based on the fact that the main change trigger determination means determines that the change condition is satisfied The change rule determined in advance for the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means based on the main timing data is established among the game conditions. Main change rule setting means for officially determining as a change rule based on the change rule setting means, the main change rule setting means, in the main change rule update process, the change rule set in the main change rule setting process The change rule determined for the scheduled change is updated to the change rule determined by the change change rule determination unit in the game process. Whether or not the sub-change rule update process is executed, and the sub-control unit determines whether the sub-change rule determining unit determines one change rule from among the plurality of the change rules for a change schedule. Sub-change opportunity determination means for determining based on the sub-time data acquired by the sub-time data acquisition means, and that the sub-change opportunity determination means determines that the change condition is satisfied. The change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means based on the determined slave time data as a machine is triggered by the fact that the change game condition is satisfied by the slave control signal output means of the master control means. Subordinate change rule setting means for officially determining a change rule based on the changed subordinate control signal generated by the subordinate control signal generating means of the main control means, and the subordinate change rule setting means includes the subordinate change rule. In the update process, the gaming machine B18 is configured to update the change rule set in the sub change rule setting process to the change rule determined for the change schedule.

  According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, in the game process, the main game control means executes the main change rule update process in which the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means. Is done. Then, in the sub control signal generation means of the main control means, the main time data acquisition means determines whether or not the change condition for determining one change rule for change schedule among the plurality of change rules is satisfied by the main change rule determination means. Based on the acquired main timing data, it is determined by the main change timing determination means, and when the main change timing determination means determines that the change condition is satisfied, the main change is made based on the determined main timing data. The change rule determined for the change schedule by the rule determining means is formally determined as the change rule by the main change rule setting means based on the fact that the preset change game condition is established among the game conditions. The change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated by the main change rule determination means to the change rule determined for change schedule in the main change rule update process. On the other hand, in the secondary control means, in the game process, the secondary change rule update process in which the change rule set in the secondary change rule setting process is updated by the change rule determined by the secondary change rule determination means is executed by the secondary game control means. Is done. Further, in the slave control means, the slave time rule data obtained by the slave time data acquisition means whether or not the change condition for determining one change rule for change schedule among the plurality of rule changes is established by the slave change rule determination means. Is determined by the sub change trigger determination unit, and the sub change rule determination unit determines the change schedule based on the determined time data when the change condition is satisfied by the sub change trigger determination unit. The change rule is formally determined by the sub change rule setting means as a change rule based on the change sub control signal generated by the sub control signal generation means of the main control means output from the sub control signal output means of the main control means. . Then, the change rule set in the sub change rule setting process is updated to the change rule determined by the sub change rule determination means for the change schedule in the sub change rule update process. Thus, the initially set change rule is updated by the main control means and the sub control means based on the change sub control signal according to the change rule determined based on the change condition being satisfied. Therefore, the change rule can be updated while taking the update timing with the changed sub control signal at the same time. Therefore, the main control means and the sub control means can be updated with the same change rule without transmitting / receiving a signal indicating the change rule to be updated. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud in which a change rule is analyzed from a signal indicating a change rule to be updated and a signal processed with the change rule analyzed by a “hanging board” or the like is output.

  In either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the main game control means updates the change rule set in the main change rule setting process with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means in the game process. The main change rule update process is executed, and the sub control signal generation means of the main control means has a main change opportunity determination means for determining that a change game condition set in advance as a change opportunity among the game conditions is satisfied. The slave control signal output means of the master control means outputs the slave change control signal generated by the slave control signal generation means to the slave control means based on the establishment of the change game condition, and the master change rule. In the main change rule update process, the determination means is acquired by the main time data acquisition means when the main change opportunity determination means determines that the changed game condition is satisfied. The change rule set in the main change rule setting process is determined by determining one change rule from a plurality of the change rules based on the master timing data, and the slave game control means The slave change rule update process is executed to update the change rule set in the slave change rule setting process with the change rule determined by the slave change rule determination means, and the slave change rule determination means updates the slave change rule. In the processing, one change rule is determined from among the plurality of change rules based on the slave time data acquired by the slave time data acquisition means when the change slave control signal is received, and the slave change rule is determined. A gaming machine B19 that updates the change rule set in the setting process.

  According to the gaming machine B19, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine B14 or B15, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, in the game process, the main game control means executes the main change rule update process in which the change rule set in the main change rule setting process is updated with the change rule determined by the main change rule determination means. Is done. In the slave control signal generation means of the main control means, the main change trigger determination means determines that the change game condition set in advance as a change trigger among the game conditions is established. In the main control means, the changed sub control signal generated by the sub control signal generation means based on the establishment of the changed game condition is output to the sub control means by the sub control signal output means. In the main change rule update process, a plurality of changes are made based on the timing data acquired by the main timing data acquisition means when the main change opportunity determination means determines that the change game condition is satisfied. One change rule among the rules is determined by the main change rule determining means, and the change rule set in the change rule setting process is updated. On the other hand, in the secondary control means, in the game process, the secondary change rule update process in which the change rule set in the secondary change rule setting process is updated by the change rule determined by the secondary change rule determination means is executed by the secondary game control means. Is done. Further, in the sub change rule update process, one change rule is determined as a sub change rule from a plurality of change rules based on the sub time data acquired by the sub time data acquisition means in response to the reception of the sub change control signal. The change rule determined by the means and set in the sub change rule setting process is updated. As a result, the main control means determines the change rule when the changed game condition is satisfied, and the slave control means generates and outputs the changed slave condition as a changed slave control signal based on the fact that the changed game condition is satisfied. Based on this, a change rule is determined. Therefore, the change rule can be determined and updated at the same time without transmitting and receiving a signal indicating the change condition to be determined between the main control means and the sub control means. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress fraud in which the change rule is analyzed by the signal indicating the change condition and the signal processed by the change rule analyzed by the “hanging board” or the like is transmitted.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A6 and B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 and B1 to B19, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine F2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game medium include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 and B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (part of slave control means)
114 Display control device (part of production execution means)
S101 (Subordinate control signal output means)
S108, S110, S114 (Subordinate control signal generating means)
S1214, S1220 (discriminating means)
S1406 (Suggest execution means)
S1413 (Suggested lottery means)

Claims (3)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for performing control based on the slave control signal from the master control means, and effect execution means for performing presentation based on instructions from the slave control means, A gaming machine in which a winning combination game that allows a player to acquire a predetermined gaming value when winning a winning combination is executed,
The main control means includes
Subordinate control signal generating means for generating the subordinate control signal based on establishment of gaming conditions;
Subordinate control signal output means for outputting the subordinate control signal generated by the subordinate control signal generation means to the subordinate control means,
The slave control means includes
Discriminating means for discriminating the slave control signal output by the slave control signal output means of the master control means;
When the determining means determines that the received slave control signal is a specific slave control signal generated based on establishment of a specific gaming condition among the gaming conditions, execution of the winning combination game Suggestion effect lottery means for drawing whether to execute a game action suggestion effect that suggests the progress of a game that is advantageous to the player in
If the game action suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect lottery means, the suggestion execution means for causing the effect execution means to perform the game operation suggestion effect in the winning combination game,
The slave control signal generation means of the main control means changes the generation method of the specific slave control signal based on a predetermined change rule, and generates the specific slave control signal,
The determination unit of the sub control unit determines the sub control signal output by the sub control signal output unit of the main control unit based on the predetermined change rule. As a result, the sub control signal is determined to be the specific sub control signal. A gaming machine, characterized in that when it becomes a signal, it is determined that a specific gaming condition is established. The main control means includes
Main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off,
Main time data acquisition means for acquiring main time data from the main time means,
The slave control means includes
Subordinate timing means synchronized with the main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off,
And subordinate time data acquisition means for acquiring subordinate time data from the subordinate time means,
At least one of the main control means and the sub control means corrects the main time data when provided in the main control means, and changes the sub time data when provided in the sub control means. Having correction means for correcting,
The sub control signal generating means of the main control means determines a change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the main time data or the main time data when corrected by the correction means. Having rule decision means;
The sub control means determines sub change rule determining means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the corrected sub time data when corrected by the subordinate time data or the correction means. Have
The main change rule determination unit and the sub change rule determination unit determine the same change rule by correcting at least one of the main time data and the sub time data by the correction unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The main control means includes
Main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off,
Main time data acquisition means for acquiring main time data from the main time means,
The slave control means includes
Subordinate timing means synchronized with the main timing means capable of timing even when the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off,
And subordinate time data acquisition means for acquiring subordinate time data from the subordinate time means,
At least one of the main control means and the subordinate control means determines a timing at which the main time data acquisition means and the subordinate time data acquisition means can respectively acquire the main time data and the subordinate time data at the same timing. Synchronization determination means to
The sub control signal generating means of the main control means comprises main change rule determining means for determining one change rule from among the plurality of change rules based on the master timing data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determining means. Have
The slave control means has slave change rule determination means for determining one change rule from the plurality of change rules based on the slave time data acquired at the timing determined by the synchronization determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized.

Images